C M Y CM Yukon/Yukon XL/Denali Owner’s Manual · GMC Yukon/Yukon XL/Denali Owner Manual...

Yukon/Yukon XL/Denali Owner’s Manual

2018 Yukon/Yukon XL/Denali

84016524 A

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

18_GMC_Yukon_YukonDenalli_COV_en_US_84016524A_2017JUN23.ai 1 6/21/2017 8:13:42 AM18_GMC_Yukon_YukonDenalli_COV_en_US_84016524A_2017JUN23.ai 1 6/21/2017 8:13:42 AM

GMC Yukon/Yukon XL/Denali Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico-11349262) - 2018 - crc - 6/20/17

Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . 27

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Instruments and Controls . . . . . . 122

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 179

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . 188

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Service and Maintenance . . . . . 369

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Customer Information . . . . . . . . . 386

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . 396

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412


2 Introduction

Introduction

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, GMC, theGMC Truck Emblem, YUKON, andDENALI are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Company” forGMC wherever it appears in thismanual.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment thatwas not purchased on the vehicle,model variants, countryspecifications, features/applicationsthat may not be available in yourregion, or changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner’s manual.

Refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm thefeatures.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle OwnersA French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

Propriétaires Canadiens

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170USA

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warning, andCautionWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 84016524 A First Printing ©2017 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


Introduction 3

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : Shown when the owner’smanual has additional instructionsor information.

* : Shown when the servicemanual has additional instructionsor information.

0 : Shown when there is moreinformation on another page —“see page.”

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. See thefeatures in this manual forinformation.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

` : Do Not Puncture

^ : Do Not Service

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

_ : Flame/Fire Prohibited

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

O : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Seat Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor


4 Introduction

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak

a : Under Pressure

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


In Brief 5

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . 8Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 9Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Heated and Ventilated Seats . . . 13Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 13Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Passenger Sensing System . . . 14Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . 15Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . 17Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Vehicle FeaturesInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . 20Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . 20Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . 21Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . 21Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 22Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Universal Remote System . . . . . 23Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . 24Fuel (L83 5.3L V8 Engine) . . . . . 25Fuel (L86 6.2L V8 Engine) . . . . . 25E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . 25

Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26


6 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 7

1. Air Vents 0 185.

2. Head-Up Display (HUD) 0 154(If Equipped).

3. g Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 229.

j Power Assist Steps 0 48 (IfEquipped).

X Parking Assist Button (IfEquipped). See AssistanceSystems for Parking or Backing0 243.

A Lane Departure Warning(LDW) 0 252 (If Equipped).

0 Pedal Adjust Switch (IfEquipped). See AdjustableThrottle and Brake Pedal0 205.

4. Turn Signal Lever. See Turnand Lane-Change Signals0 174.

Windshield Wiper/Washer0 123.

5. Favorite Switches (Out ofView). See “Steering WheelControls” in the infotainmentmanual.

Volume Switches (Out of View).See “Steering Wheel Controls”in the infotainment manual.

6. Hazard Warning Flashers0 174.

7. Instrument Cluster 0 133.

8. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission 0 216.

Tow/Haul Selector Button. SeeTow/Haul Mode 0 222.

Range Selection Mode (IfEquipped). See Manual Mode0 218.

9. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System 0 173.

10. Infotainment 0 179.

11. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 180.

12. Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats 0 67.

13. Rear Climate Control Buttons.See Rear Climate ControlSystem 0 184.

14. Ignition Positions (Key Access)0 207 or Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) 0 205.

15. Steering Wheel Controls. Seethe infotainment manual.

16. Horn 0 123.

17. Steering Wheel Adjustment0 123.

18. Hood Release. See Hood0 279.

19. Cruise Control 0 233.

Adaptive Cruise Control 0 235(If Equipped).

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 246 (If Equipped).

Heated Steering Wheel 0 123.

20. Trailer Brake Control Panel (IfEquipped). See TowingEquipment 0 267.

21. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 143.


8 In Brief

22. Automatic Transfer Case Knob(If Equipped). See Four-WheelDrive 0 222.

23. Parking Brake 0 228.

24. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 170.

Fog Lamps 0 175 (IfEquipped).

25. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 176.

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner’s manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is used to remotely lockand unlock the doors and it maywork up to 60 m (197 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Key Access RKE Transmitter

Keyless Access RKE Transmitter

K : Press to unlock the driver door.Press K again within three secondsto unlock all remaining doors.


In Brief 9

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

b : Press twice to open or closethe liftgate. Press once to stop theliftgate from moving.

c : Press twice to open theliftglass.

7 : Press and release to initiatevehicle locate. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press 7 and hold for more thanthree seconds to sound the panicalarm.

Press 7 again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Keys (Keyless Access) 0 27 orKeys (Key Access) 0 28 andRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 31.

Remote Vehicle StartThe engine can be started fromoutside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

Start the vehicle normally afterentering.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on.

Remote start can be extended.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start 0 39.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the doors frominside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on a power doorlock switch.

. Pushing down the manual lockknob on the driver door will lockall doors. Pushing down the lockknob on a passenger door willlock that door only.

. Pulling the door handle once willunlock that door. Pulling thehandle again will unlatch it.

To lock or unlock the doors fromoutside the vehicle press Q or K onthe RKE transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access)0 31 or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeylessAccess) 0 33.


10 In Brief

Power Door Locks

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

See Door Locks 0 41.

Keyless Access

If equipped with Keyless Access,the RKE transmitter must be within1 m (3 ft) of the driver door.Pressing the button on the driverdoor handle will unlock the driverdoor. If the handle button is pressedagain within five seconds, thepassenger doors and liftgate willunlock.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access)0 31 or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeylessAccess) 0 33.

Liftgate

To open the liftgate, press K on the

power door lock switch or press Kon the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter twice to unlock all doors.Press the touch pad on theunderside of the liftgate handle andlift up.


Use the pull cup to lower and closethe liftgate. Do not press the touchpad while closing the liftgate. Thiswill cause the liftgate to beunlatched.

Power Liftgate Operation

If equipped with a power liftgate, theswitch is on the overhead console.The vehicle must be in P (Park).

Choose the power liftgate mode byselecting MAX or 3/4. Press8 onthe overhead console. On the RKEtransmitter pressb twice quickly.

Pressing and releasingb while theliftgate is moving stops the liftgate.Pressing again reverses thedirection.

To close, pressl on the bottomof the liftgate next to the latch.


In Brief 11

To disable the power liftgatefunction, select OFF on the liftgateswitch. See Liftgate 0 43.

Windows

Power windows work when theignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 212.

Using the window switch, press toopen or pull to close the window.

The windows may be temporarilydisabled if they are used repeatedlywithin a short time.

Seat Adjustment

Power Seats

To adjust the seat:

. Move the seat forward orrearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment 0 62.

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

See Reclining Seatbacks 0 63.


12 In Brief

Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust the lumbar support:

. Press and hold the controlforward to increase or rearwardto decrease upper and lowerlumbar support at the same time.

. Press and hold the control up toincrease upper lumbar supportand decrease lower lumbarsupport.

Press and hold the control downto increase lower lumbar supportand decrease upper lumbarsupport.

See Lumbar Adjustment 0 63.

Memory Features

If equipped, memory seats allow twodrivers to store and recall theirunique seat positions for driving thevehicle, and a shared exit positionfor getting out of the vehicle. Otherfeature positions may also be set,such as power mirrors, powersteering wheel, and adjustablepedals, if equipped. Memorypositions are linked to RKEtransmitter 1 or 2 for automaticmemory recalls.

Before storing, adjust all availablememory feature positions. Turn theignition on and then press and

release SET; a beep will sound.Then immediately press and hold 1,2, orB (Exit) on the driver dooruntil two beeps sound. To manuallyrecall these positions, press andhold 1, 2, orB until the savedposition is reached.

When Auto Memory Recall isenabled in vehicle personalization,positions previously stored tomemory buttons 1 and 2 arerecalled when the ignition ischanged from off to on or ACC/ACCESSORY.

When Easy Exit Options is enabledin vehicle personalization, thefeature automatically recalls thepreviously stored exit position whenexiting the vehicle. See MemorySeats 0 64.

Second Row SeatsThe second row seatbacks can befolded for additional cargo space,or the seats can be folded andtumbled for easy entry/exit to thethird row seats. The seatbacks alsorecline.


In Brief 13

See Second Row Seats 0 69.

Third Row SeatsThird row seatbacks can be folded.See Third Row Seats 0 74.

Heated and VentilatedSeats

The buttons are on the center stackbelow the climate control system. Tooperate, the engine must berunning.

PressI to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.

Press J to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press C to ventilate the driver orpassenger seat.

See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats 0 67.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints 0 61 andPower Seat Adjustment 0 62.

Seat Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to useseat belts properly:

. Seat Belts 0 76.

. How to Wear Seat Belts Properly0 77.

. Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 78.

. Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 104.


14 In Brief

Passenger SensingSystem

United States

Canada and Mexico

The passenger sensing system willturn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System 0 91

The passenger airbag statusindicator will light on the overheadconsole when the vehicle is started.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 142.

Mirror Adjustment

Interior Mirror

Adjustment

Adjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind the vehicle.

Manual Rearview Mirror

Push the tab forward for daytimeuse and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

If equipped, the mirror automaticallydims to reduce the glare ofheadlamps from behind. Thedimming feature comes on when thevehicle is started.

Exterior Mirrors

Power Mirrors

Shown with Power FoldingMirrors, Manual Folding Similar

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press (1) or (2) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move each mirror in thedesired direction.

3. Press either (1) or (2) again todeselect the mirror.

See Power Mirrors 0 53.


In Brief 15

Folding Mirrors

The outside mirrors can be foldedinward to prevent damage whengoing through an automatic carwash. To fold, pull the mirror towardthe vehicle. See Folding Mirrors0 53.

Power Folding Mirrors

To adjust power folding mirrors,if equipped:

1. Press{ to fold the mirrorsinward.

2. Press{ again to return themirrors to the driving position.

Steering WheelAdjustmentPower Tilt and TelescopingSteering Wheel

To adjust the power tilt andtelescoping steering wheel:

Press the control to move thesteering wheel up and down orforward and rearward.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustmentIf equipped, the position of thethrottle and brake pedals can bechanged.

The switch used to adjust thepedals is to the left of the steeringwheel.

Press the switch to the left to movethe pedals closer to your body.Press the switch to the right to movethe pedals away.

See Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal 0 205.


16 In Brief

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction, which lets pedal settingsbe saved and recalled. See MemorySeats 0 64.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

There are dome lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

OFF : Turns the lamps off, evenwhen a door is open.

DOOR : The lamps come onautomatically when a door isopened.

ON : Turns all dome lamps on.

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped. To operate, the ignitionbe on or in ACC/ACCESSORY orusing Retained AccessoryPower (RAP).

Pressm orn next to each readinglamp to turn it on or off.

For more information on interiorlighting, see Instrument PanelIllumination Control 0 176.

Exterior Lighting


In Brief 17

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

There are four positions.

O : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turn the headlampcontrol to O again to turn theautomatic headlamps or DRLback on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position will only work whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

AUTO : Automatically turns on theheadlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, instrument panel lights,roof marker lamps (if equipped), andlicense plate lamps.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

5 : Turns on the headlamps withthe parking lamps and instrumentpanel lights.

See:

. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 170

. Fog Lamps 0 175

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper control is onthe turn signal lever.

The windshield wipers are controlledby turning the band withzFRONT on it.

1 : Fast wipes.

w : Slow wipes.

3 INT : Use this setting forintermittent wipes or Rainsense™.For intermittent wipes, turn thez

FRONT band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

To turn on Rainsense, presszAUTO on the lever, then turn thez FRONT band on the wiperlever to adjust the sensitivity.

. Turn the band up to a higher INTsetting for more sensitivity tomoisture.

. Turn the band down to the lowerINT setting for less sensitivity tomoisture.

Move the band out of the3 INTposition to deactivate Rainsense.

OFF : Turns the windshieldwipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, turn to8,then release. For several wipes,hold the band on8 longer.

Lm : Push the paddle at the top ofthe lever to spray washer fluid onthe windshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer0 123.


18 In Brief

Climate ControlsThis system controls the heating,cooling, and ventilation.

1. Driver Temperature Control

2. A/C (Air Conditioning)

3. Air Delivery Mode Controls

4. Fan Control

5. Defrost

6. Passenger TemperatureControl

7. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)

8. Rear Window Defogger

9. RCTRL (Rear Climate ControlLockout)

10. Rear Temperature Control

11. Rear Air Delivery Mode Control

12. Rear Fan Control

13. Front Climate Control PowerButton

14. Rear AUTO (AutomaticOperation)

15. Rear Climate Control PowerButton

16. Air Recirculation

17. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 180 and Rear ClimateControl System 0 184 (if equipped).

Transmission

Range Selection Mode

The Range Selection Mode switch,if equipped, is on the shift lever.

1. To enable the Range Selectionfeature, move the shift lever tothe L (Manual Mode) position.The current range will appearnext to the L. This is thehighest attainable range withall lower gears accessible. Asan example, when 5 (Fifth)gear is selected, 1 (First)through 5 (Fifth) gears areavailable.

2. Press the plus/minus buttonson the shift lever to select thedesired range of gears forcurrent driving conditions. SeeManual Mode 0 218.


In Brief 19

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 222.

Four-Wheel DriveIf equipped, the engine's drivingpower can be sent to all four wheelsfor extra traction.

Automatic Transfer Case

Two Speed Transfer Case

Single Speed Transfer Case

The transfer case knob is to the leftof the steering wheel. Use this knobto shift into and out of the differentfour-wheel drive modes.

2 m : This setting is used for drivingin most street and highwaysituations.

AUTO : This setting is ideal for usewhen road surface tractionconditions are variable.

4 m : Use the Four-Wheel Drive Highposition when extra traction isneeded, such as on snowy or icyroads or in most off-road situations.

4 n : Vehicles with a two speedautomatic transfer case have aFour-Wheel Drive Low position. Thissetting sends maximum power to allfour wheels. You might choose 4 n ifyou are driving off-road in deepsand, mud, or snow, and whileclimbing or descending steep hills.

N (Neutral) : Vehicles with a twospeed automatic transfer case havean N (Neutral) position. Shift thetransfer case to N (Neutral) onlywhen towing the vehicle.See Recreational Vehicle Towing0 355 or Towing the Vehicle 0 355.

See Four-Wheel Drive 0 222.


20 In Brief

Vehicle Features

Infotainment SystemSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE),and voice or speech recognition,if equipped. It also includesinformation on settings.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steeringwheel controls. See "SteeringWheel Controls" in the infotainmentmanual.

Cruise Control

5 : Press to turn the system on oroff. The indicator light is white whencruise control is on and turns offwhen cruise control is off.

SET − : Press briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease vehicle speed.

+RES : If there is a set speed inmemory, press to resume thatspeed or press and hold toaccelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control 0 233 orAdaptive Cruise Control 0 235 (IfEquipped).

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the instrumentcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems.

w orx : Press to move up ordown in a list.


In Brief 21

o or p : Press to move betweenthe interactive display zones in thecluster.

V : Press to open a menu or selecta menu item. Press and hold toreset values on certain screens.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)0 151.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, FCA may help avoid orreduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes. FCA provides agreen indicator,V, when a vehicleis detected ahead. This indicatordisplays amber if you follow avehicle too closely. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a flashing redalert on the windshield and rapidlybeeps or pulses the driver seat.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 246.

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB)If the vehicle has Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), it also has FAB, whichincludes Intelligent BrakeAssist (IBA). When the systemdetects a vehicle ahead in your paththat is traveling in the samedirection that you may be about tocrash into, it can provide a boost tobraking or automatically brake thevehicle. This can help avoid orlessen the severity of crashes whendriving in a forward gear.

See Forward Automatic Braking(FAB) 0 248.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)If equipped, LKA may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel if thevehicle approaches a detected lanemarking without using a turn signalin that direction. It may also providea Lane Departure Warning (LDW)alert as the lane marking is crossed.The system will not assist or alert if

it detects that you are activelysteering. Override LKA by turningthe steering wheel. LKA uses acamera to detect lane markingsbetween 60 km/h (37 mph) and180 km/h (112 mph).

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)0 252 and Lane Keep Assist (LKA)0 252.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)If equipped, the LCA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding lane changecrashes that occur with movingvehicles in the side blind zone (orspot) areas or with vehicles rapidlyapproaching these areas frombehind. The LCA warning displaywill light up in the correspondingoutside mirror and will flash if theturn signal is on. The Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system isincluded as part of the LCA system.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)0 250 and Lane Change Alert (LCA)0 250.


22 In Brief

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, RVC shows a view ofthe area behind the vehicle on theinfotainment display when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse) toaid with parking and low-speedbacking maneuvers.

See Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing 0 243.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) SystemIf equipped, the RCTA system usesa triangle with an arrow on theinfotainment display to warn oftraffic behind your vehicle that maycross your vehicle's path while inR (Reverse). In addition, beeps willsound, or the driver seat will pulse.


Parking AssistIf equipped, Rear ParkingAssist (RPA) uses sensors on therear bumper to assist with parking

and avoiding objects while inR (Reverse). It operates at speedsless than 8 km/h (5 mph). RPA mayshow a warning triangle on theinfotainment display and a graphicon the instrument cluster to providethe object distance. In addition,multiple beeps or seat pulses mayoccur if very close to an object.

The vehicle may also have the FrontParking Assist system.


Power Outlets

Power Outlets 12-Volt DirectCurrent

Accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone, MP3player, etc.

The vehicle may have up to fiveaccessory power outlets:

Vehicles with a Center Console

. One in front of the cupholders onthe center console

. One inside the center storageconsole

. One on the rear of the centerstorage console

. One in the third row seat on thedriver side

. One in the rear cargo area onthe passenger side

Vehicles with Bench Seats

. One on the center stack belowthe climate control system

. One in the storage area on thebench seat

. One on the rear of the centerarmrest storage

. One in the third row seat area onthe driver side


Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.

See Power Outlets 0 127.


In Brief 23

Universal Remote System

If equipped with the UniversalRemote system, these buttons willbe in the front overhead console.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

See Universal Remote System0 166.

Sunroof

1. SLIDE Switch2. TILT Switch

If equipped, the sunroof onlyoperates when the ignition is on orin ACC/ACCESSORY, or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 212.

Slide Switch

Express-Open/Express-Close : Toexpress-open the sunroof, fullypress and release I (1). Toexpress-close the sunroof, fully

press and releaseK (1). Pressthe switch again to stop themovement.

Open/Close (Manual Mode) : Toopen the sunroof, press and hold I(1). Release the switch at thedesired position. Press and holdK (1) to close the sunroof.Release the switch at the desiredposition.

Tilt Switch

Vent : From the closed position,pressJ (2) to vent the sunroof.

PressK (2) to close thesunroof vent.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise.The air deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadewhich can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually.


24 In Brief

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theautomatic reversal system willdetect the object and stop thesunroof.

See Sunroof 0 58.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe vehicle has a traction controlsystem that limits wheel spin andthe StabiliTrak system that assistswith directional control of the vehiclein difficult driving conditions. Bothsystems come on automaticallywhen the vehicle is started andbegins to move.

. To turn off traction control, pressand release g on the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. The traction off light idisplays in the instrumentcluster. The appropriate DICmessage displays.

. To turn off both traction controland StabiliTrak, press and holdg until i and g illuminate in theinstrument cluster and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays.

. Press and release g again toturn on both systems.

StabiliTrak will automatically turn onif the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h(35 mph). Traction control willremain off.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 229.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire and


In Brief 25

Loading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 200. Thewarning light will remain on until thetire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System0 329.

Tire Fill Alert (If Equipped)

This feature provides visual andaudible alerts outside the vehicle tohelp when inflating an underinflatedtire to the recommended cold tirepressure. See “Tire Fill Alert (IfEquipped)” under Tire PressureMonitor Operation 0 330.

Fuel (L83 5.3L V8 Engine)

Regular Fuel

Use only unleaded gasoline rated87 octane or higher in your vehicle.Do not use gasoline with an octanerating lower as it may result invehicle damage and lower fueleconomy. See Fuel 0 254.

Fuel (L86 6.2L V8 Engine)

Premium Recommended Fuel

Use premium 93 octane unleadedgasoline in your vehicle. Unleadedgasoline with an octane rating as

low as 87 may be used, but it willreduce performance and fueleconomy. See Fuel 0 254.

E85 or FlexFuel

FlexFuel Possible

Certain models are compatible withE85 fuel. See E85 or FlexFuel0 256.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays a DIC message whenit is necessary to change the engineoil and filter. The oil life systemshould be reset to 100% onlyfollowing an oil change.


26 In Brief

Resetting the Oil Life System

To reset the engine oil life system:

1. Display REMAINING OIL LIFEon the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 151.

2. Press and hold V on the DIC.The oil life will changeto 100%.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Display REMAINING OIL LIFEon the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 151.

2. Fully press the acceleratorpedal slowly three times withinfive seconds.

3. If the display changes to 100%,the system is reset.

See Engine Oil Life System 0 285.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.

. Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

. Brake gradually and avoidabrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-888-881-3302

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

New GMC owners are automaticallyenrolled in the Roadside AssistanceProgram.

See Roadside Assistance Program0 390.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 27

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys (Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . 27Keys (Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (KeyAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (KeylessAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 39Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 42Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

DoorsLiftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 49

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . . 51

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . 54Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 55Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . 55Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Child-View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Keys and Locks

Keys (Keyless Access)

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withan ignition key or RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter isdangerous and children or otherscould be seriously injured orkilled. They could operate thepower window or other controls ormake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with the keyin the ignition or with the RKEtransmitter in the vehicle, andchildren or others could be caughtin the path of a closing window.Do not leave children in a vehiclewith the ignition key or an RKEtransmitter.


28 Keys, Doors, and Windows

If the vehicle has the KeylessAccess system, there is a key in thetransmitter.

This key is used for the driver doorand glove box.

If the vehicle has the KeylessAccess system, the transmitter hasa button on the side of thetransmitter used to remove the key.Do not pull the key out withoutpressing the button.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

If it becomes difficult to turn a key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

With an active OnStar service plan,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview 0 400.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program0 390.

If equipped with memory seats, RKEtransmitters 1 and 2 are linked toseating positions of memory 1 or 2.See Memory Seats 0 64.

Keys (Key Access)

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withan ignition key or RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter isdangerous and children or otherscould be seriously injured orkilled. They could operate thepower window or other controls ormake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with the keyin the ignition or with the RKEtransmitter in the vehicle, andchildren or others could be caughtin the path of a closing window.Do not leave children in a vehiclewith the ignition key or an RKEtransmitter.



{ Warning

If the key is unintentionallyrotated while the vehicle isrunning, the ignition could bemoved out of the RUN position.This could be caused by heavyitems hanging from the key ring,or by large or long items attachedto the key ring that could becontacted by the driver orsteering wheel. If the ignitionmoves out of the RUN position,the engine will shut off, brakingand steering power assist may be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

impacted, and airbags may notdeploy. To reduce the risk ofunintentional rotation of theignition key, do not change theway the ignition key and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,if equipped, are connected to theprovided key rings.

The ignition key and key rings, andRKE transmitter, if equipped, aredesigned to work together as asystem to reduce the risk ofunintentionally moving the key outof the RUN position. The ignitionkey has a small hole to allowattachment of the provided key ring.It is important that any replacementignition keys have a small hole. Seeyour dealer if a replacement key isrequired.

The combination and size of therings that came with your keys werespecifically selected for yourvehicle. The rings are connected tothe key like two links of a chain toreduce the risk of unintentionally

moving the key out of the RUNposition. Do not add any additionalitems to the ring attached to theignition key. Attach additional itemsonly to the second ring, and limitadded items to a few essential keysor small, light items no larger thanan RKE transmitter.



Interference from radio-frequencyidentification (RFID) tags mayprevent the key from starting thevehicle. Keep RFID tags away fromthe key when starting the vehicle.

The key is used for the driver door,ignition, and glove box.

If equipped with memory seats,keys 1 and 2 are linked to seatingpositions of memory 1 or 2. SeeMemory Seats 0 64.

Programming Keys to theVehicle

Follow these procedures to programup to eight keys to the vehicle.

Programming with TwoRecognized Keys (KeyVehicles Only)

To program a new key:

1. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key in the ignitionand turn the ignition on withoutstarting the engine.

2. Turn the ignition off andremove the key.

3. Quickly, within five seconds,insert the second originalalready programmed key in theignition and turn the ignition onwithout starting the engine.

4. Turn the ignition off andremove the key.

5. Insert the new key to beprogrammed, and withinfive seconds, turn the ignitionon without starting the engine.

The security light will turn offonce the key has beenprogrammed.

6. Repeat Steps 1–5 if additionalkeys are to be programmed.

If a key is lost or damaged, see yourdealer to have a new key made.

Programming without RecognizedKeys (Key Vehicles Only)

Program a new key to the vehiclewhen a recognized key is notavailable. Canadian regulationsrequire that Canadian owners seetheir dealer.

If two currently recognized keys arenot available, follow this procedureto program the first key.

This procedure will takeapproximately 30 minutes tocomplete for the first key. Thevehicle must be off and all of thekeys must be with you.

1. Insert the new vehicle key intothe ignition.

2. Turn the ignition on withoutstarting the engine. Thesecurity light will come on.

3. Wait 10 minutes until thesecurity light turns off.

4. Turn the ignition off.



5. Repeat Steps 2–4 two moretimes. After the third time, turnthe ignition on; the key islearned and all previouslyknown keys will no longer workwith the vehicle.

6. To learn the second key, turnthe ignition off, insert thesecond key to be learned, andturn the ignition on withoutstarting the engine.

After the two keys are learned,remaining keys can be learned byfollowing the procedure in“Programming with Two RecognizedKeys (Key Vehicles Only).”

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin the vehicle.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

If it becomes difficult to turn a key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program0 390.

With an active OnStar service plan,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview 0 400.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 396.

If there is a decrease in the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) operatingrange:

. Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation(Key Access)The RKE transmitter functions maywork up to 60 m (197 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 31.



/ : Press and release Q, thenimmediately press and hold/ untilthe turn signal lamps flash or for atleast four seconds. The engine maybe started from outside the vehicleusing the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Vehicle Start 0 39.


If enabled, the turn signal lampsflash once to indicate locking hasoccurred. If enabled, the horn chirpswhen Q is pressed again withinthree seconds. See VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

Pressing Q arms the alarm system.See Vehicle Alarm System 0 49.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding Q forone second will fold the mirrors,if enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

K : Press once to unlock only thedriver door. If K is pressed againwithin three seconds, all remainingdoors unlock. The interior lamps

may come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on.

If enabled, the turn signal lampsflash twice to indicate unlocking hasoccurred. If enabled, the exteriorlamps may turn on. See VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the alarm system. SeeVehicle Alarm System 0 49.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding K forone second will unfold the mirrors,if enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

Press and hold K until the windowsfully open, if enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 158.



7 : Press and release to initiate thevehicle locator. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and hold 7 for more thanthree seconds to activate the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns offwhen the ignition is turned on or 7is pressed again. The ignition mustbe off for the panic alarm to work.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.Each vehicle can have up toeight transmitters programmed to it.See your dealer for transmitterprogramming.



Battery Replacement

Replace the battery in thetransmitter soon if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYdisplays in the DIC.

Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate and remove the backcover of the transmitter with aflat, thin object, such as a coin.

2. Press and slide the batterydown toward the pocket of thetransmitter in the direction ofthe key ring. Do not use ametal object

3. Remove the battery.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

5. Push together the transmitterback cover top side first, andthen the bottom toward thekey ring.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation(Keyless Access)The Keyless Access system allowsfor vehicle entry when thetransmitter is within 1 m (3 ft). See“Keyless Access Operation” later inthis section.

The RKE transmitter functions maywork up to 60 m (197 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 31.



/ : Press and release Q, thenimmediately press and hold/ untilthe turn signal lamps flash or for atleast four seconds. The engine maybe started from outside the vehicleusing the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Vehicle Start 0 39.


If enabled, the turn signal lampsflash once on the second press toindicate locking has occurred.If enabled, the horn chirps when Qis pressed again withinthree seconds. See VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed, all doors will lock and thenthe driver door will immediatelyunlock, if enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

If the passenger door is open whenQ is pressed, all doors lock.

Pressing Q arms the alarm system.See Vehicle Alarm System 0 49.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding Q forone second will fold the mirrors,if enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

K : Press once to unlock only thedriver door. If K is pressed againwithin three seconds, all remainingdoors unlock. The interior lampsmay come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on.

If enabled, the turn signal lampsflash twice to indicate unlocking hasoccurred. If enabled, the exteriorlamps may turn on. See VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the alarm system. SeeVehicle Alarm System 0 49.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding K forone second will unfold the mirrors,if enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

Press and hold K until the windowsfully open, if remote windowoperation is enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 158.



7 : Press and release to initiatevehicle locate. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and hold 7 for more thanthree seconds to activate the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns offwhen the ignition is turned on or 7is pressed again. The ignition mustbe off for the panic alarm to work.

Keyless Access Operation

The Keyless Access system allowsfor doors and the liftgate to beaccessed without pressing the RKEtransmitter button. The RKEtransmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft)



of the liftgate or door being opened.If the vehicle has this feature, therewill be a button on the outside doorhandles.

Keyless Access can beprogrammed to unlock all doors onthe first lock/unlock press from thedriver door. See VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

If equipped with memory seats, RKEtransmitters 1 and 2 are linked toseating positions of memory 1 or 2.See Memory Seats 0 64.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Driver Door

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the door handle, pressing thelock/unlock button on the driver doorhandle will unlock the driver door.If the lock/unlock button is pressedagain within five seconds, allpassenger doors and the liftgate willunlock.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:

. It has been more thanfive seconds since the first lock/unlock button press.

. Two lock/unlock button presseswere used to unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has beenopened and all doors are nowclosed.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Passenger Doors

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the door handle, pressing thelock/unlock button on a passengerdoor handle will unlock all doors.Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:

. The lock/unlock button was usedto unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has beenopened and all doors are nowclosed.

Passive Locking

If equipped with Keyless Access,this feature will lock the vehicleseveral seconds after all doors areclosed, if the vehicle is off and atleast one RKE transmitter has beenremoved from the interior, or noneremain in the interior.

If other electronic devices interferewith the RKE transmitter signal, thevehicle may not detect the RKEtransmitter inside the vehicle.If passive locking is enabled, the



doors may lock with the RKEtransmitter inside the vehicle. Donot leave the RKE transmitter in anunattended vehicle.

To customize the doors toautomatically lock when exiting thevehicle, see “Remote Lock, Unlock,Start” under Vehicle Personalization0 158.

Temporary Disable of PassiveLocking

Temporarily disable passive lockingby pressing and holding K on theinterior door switch with a door openfor at least four seconds, or untilthree chimes are heard. Passivelocking will then remain disableduntil Q on the interior door ispressed, or until the vehicle isturned on.

Remote Left In Vehicle Alert

When the vehicle is turned off andan RKE transmitter is left in thevehicle, the horn will chirp threetimes after all doors are closed. Toturn on or off see VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

Remote No Longer in Vehicle Alert

If the vehicle is on with a door open,and then all doors are closed, thevehicle will check for RKEtransmitters inside. If an RKEtransmitter is not detected, the DICwill display NO REMOTEDETECTED and the horn will chirpthree times. This occurs only onceeach time the vehicle is driven. Toturn on or off see VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

Keyless Liftgate Opening

Press the touch pad on theunderside of the liftgate handle toopen the liftgate when all doors areunlocked, or when the transmitter iswithin 1 m (3 ft).

Keyless Liftglass Opening

Press the exterior liftglass button toopen the liftglass when all doors areunlocked, or when the transmitter iswithin 1 m (3 ft).

See Liftgate 0 43.

Key Access

To access a vehicle with a deadtransmitter battery, see Door Locks0 41.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmitters nolonger work. Each vehicle can haveup to eight transmitters matchedto it.

Programming with TwoRecognized Transmitters (KeylessAccess Vehicles Only)

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere are two recognizedtransmitters.

To program, the vehicle must be offand all transmitters, both currentlyrecognized and new, must bewith you.



1. Remove the key from therecognized transmitter.

2. Place the two recognizedtransmitters in the cupholder oron the passenger seat.

3. Insert the vehicle key into thekey lock cylinder on the driverdoor handle. Then turn the keycounterclockwise, to the unlockposition, five times within10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays READY FORREMOTE#2, 3, 4, ETC.

4. Place the new transmitter inthe transmitter pocket/insert.

Open the center consolestorage area and the storagetray. The transmitter pocket/insert is in front of the storagearea next to the center consolestorage area between thedriver and front passengerseats.

5. Press ENGINE START/STOP.When the transmitter islearned, the DIC display willshow that it is ready to programthe next transmitter.

6. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter pocket andpress K or Q on thetransmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4–6.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press andhold ENGINE START/STOP forapproximately 12 seconds toexit programming mode.

7. Return the key back into thetransmitter.

Programming without TwoRecognized Transmitters (KeylessAccess Vehicles Only)

If two currently recognizedtransmitters are not available, followthis procedure to program up toeight transmitters. This feature isnot available in Canada. Thisprocedure will take approximately30 minutes to complete. The vehiclemust be off and all transmitters tobe programmed must be with you.

1. Remove the vehicle key fromthe transmitter.

2. Insert the vehicle key into thekey lock cylinder on the driverdoor handle; then turn the keycounterclockwise, to the unlockposition, five times within10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays REMOTELEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.



3. Wait for 10 minutes until theDIC displays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARN,then press ENGINESTART/STOP.

The DIC will again displayREMOTE LEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

4. Repeat Step 3 two additionaltimes. After the third time allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during thenext steps.

The DIC display should nowshow READY FOR REMOTE# 1.

5. Place the new transmitter inthe transmitter pocket/insert.

Open the center consolestorage area and the storagetray. The transmitter pocket/insert is in front of the storagearea next to the center consolestorage area between thedriver and front passengerseats.

6. Press ENGINE START/STOP.When the transmitter islearned, the DIC display willshow that it is ready to programthe next transmitter.

7. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter pocket/insertand press K or Q on thetransmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 5–7.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press andhold ENGINE START/STOP forapproximately 12 seconds toexit programming mode.

8. Return the key back into thetransmitter.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak or ifthere is interference with the signal,the DIC may display NO REMOTEDETECTED or NO REMOTE KEYWAS DETECTED PLACE KEY INTRANSMITTER POCKET THENSTART YOUR VEHICLE whenstarting the vehicle.

To start the vehicle:

1. Open the center consolestorage area and thestorage tray.



2. Place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket/insert.

3. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral) press the brakepedal and ENGINESTART/STOP.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery in thetransmitter soon if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.

Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. With the key removed, insert aflat, thin object in the center ofthe transmitter to separate andremove the back cover.

2. Lift the battery with a flatobject.

3. Remove the battery.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside toward the back cover.Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

5. Push together the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartThe climate control system willcome on when the vehicle is startedremotely depending on the outsidetemperature.



The rear defog and heated andventilated seats may also come on.See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats 0 67 and VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.Check local regulations for anyrequirements on remote starting ofvehicles.

Do not use remote start if thevehicle is low on fuel.

The vehicle cannot be remotestarted if:

. The key is in the ignition (KeyAccess) or the RKE transmitteris in the vehicle (KeylessAccess).

. The hood is not closed.

. There is an emission controlsystem malfunction and themalfunction indicator lamp is on.

The engine will turn off during aremote vehicle start if:

. The coolant temperature getstoo high.

. The oil pressure gets low.

The RKE transmitter range may bereduced while the vehicle is running.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 31 or VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

1. Press and release Q.

2. Immediately press and hold /until the turn signal lamps flashor for at least four seconds.

When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps will turn on. Thedoors will be locked and theclimate control system maycome on.

The engine will continue to runfor 10 minutes. RepeatSteps 1 and 2 for a 10-minutetime extension.

Turn the ignition on to operate thevehicle.

Extending Engine Run Time

The engine run time can beextended by 10 minutes, for a totalof 20 minutes, if during the first10 minutes Steps 1 and 2 arerepeated while the engine is stillrunning. An extension can berequested, 30 seconds afterstarting.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a single start with an extension,is allowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must beturned on and then back off to useremote start again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.


. Turn the ignition on and then off.



Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. The doorscan be unlocked andopened while the vehicle ismoving. The chance ofbeing thrown out of thevehicle in a crash isincreased if the doors arenot locked. So, allpassengers should wearseat belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A childcan be overcome byextreme heat and can sufferpermanent injuries or even

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

death from heat stroke.Always lock the vehiclewhenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking thedoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock or unlock the doors fromoutside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

. Use the key in the driver door.

To lock or unlock the doors frominside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on the power doorlock switch.

. Pushing down the manual lockknob on the driver door will lockall doors. Pushing down the

manual lock knob on apassenger door will lock onlythat door.

. Pulling an interior door handlewill unlock the door. Pulling thedoor handle again unlatches it.

Keyless Access

If equipped, the RKE transmittermust be within 1 m (3 ft) of theliftgate or door being opened. Pressthe button on the door handle toopen. See “Keyless AccessOperation” in Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeyAccess) 0 31 or Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation(Keyless Access) 0 33.

Free-Turning Locks

The door key lock cylinder turnsfreely when either the wrong key isused, or the correct key is not fullyinserted. The free-turning door lockfeature prevents the lock from beingforced open. To reset the lock, turnit to the vertical position with thecorrect key fully inserted. Removethe key and insert it again. If this



does not reset the lock, turn the keyhalfway around in the cylinder andrepeat the reset procedure.

Power Door Locks

Press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access)0 31 or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeylessAccess) 0 33.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Delayed LockingThis feature delays the locking ofthe doors until five seconds after alldoors are closed.

Delayed locking can only be turnedon when the Unlocked DoorAnti-Lockout feature has beenturned off.

When Q is pressed on the powerdoor lock switch while the door isopen, a chime will sound threetimes indicating delayed locking isactive.

The doors will lock automaticallyfive seconds after all doors areclosed. If a door is reopened beforethat time, the five-second timer willreset when all doors are closedagain.

Press Q on the door lock switch

again or press Q on the RKEtransmitter to lock the doorsimmediately.

This feature can be programmed.See “Delayed Door Lock” underVehicle Personalization 0 158.

Automatic Door LocksThe doors will lock automaticallywhen all doors are closed, theignition is on, and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park).

If a vehicle door is unlocked, andthen opened and closed, the doorswill lock either when your foot isremoved from the brake or thevehicle speed becomes faster than13 km/h (8 mph).

To unlock the doors:

. Press K on the power door lockswitch.

. Shift the transmission intoP (Park).

Automatic door locking cannot bedisabled. Automatic door unlockingcan be programmed. See VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

Lockout ProtectionKey Access : When locking isrequested with the driver door openand the key in the ignition, all thedoors will lock and then the driverdoor will unlock.



This can be manually overridden bypressing and holding Q on thepower door lock switch.

Keyless Access : When locking isrequested with the driver door openand the vehicle is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, all the doors will lockand then the driver door will unlock.

If the vehicle is off and locking isrequested while a door is open,when all doors are closed thevehicle will check for RKEtransmitters inside. If an RKEtransmitter is detected and thenumber of RKE transmitters insidehas not reduced, the driver door willunlock and the horn will sound threetimes.

This can be manually overridden bypressing and holding Q on thepower door lock switch.

Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

If Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout isturned on and the vehicle is off, thedriver door is open, and locking isrequested, all the doors will lock andthe driver door will remain open.Press the button again to lock the

driver door. The Unlocked DoorAnti-Lockout feature can be turnedon or off. See VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Press { to activate the safety lockson the rear doors. The indicator lightcomes on when activated.

Press { again to deactivate thesafety locks.

Doors

Liftgate

{ Warning

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate or trunk/hatch open,or with any objects that passthrough the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch orliftgate. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

and set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See“Climate Control Systems”in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equippedwith a power liftgate, disablethe power liftgate function.

See Engine Exhaust 0 215.

Caution

To avoid damage to the liftgate orliftgate glass, make sure the areaabove and behind the liftgate isclear before opening it.

Manual Liftgate

To open the liftgate, press K on the

power door lock switch or press Kon the RKE transmitter twice tounlock all doors. Press the touchpad (1) on the underside of theliftgate handle and lift up.

Press the button (2) above thelicense plate to open the liftglass,or pressc twice quickly on theRKE transmitter. Do not leave theliftglass open when raising theliftgate.

There will be a delay in the releaseof the liftglass if there is an attemptto open it while the rear wiper is inmotion.

Use the pull cup to lower and closethe liftgate. Do not press the touchpad while closing the liftgate. Thiswill cause the liftgate to beunlatched.

If equipped with Keyless Access,the RKE transmitter must be within1 m (3 ft) of the liftgate toautomatically unlock it.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access)0 31 or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeylessAccess) 0 33.

The liftgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected or haslow voltage, the liftgate will notopen. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.



Power Liftgate Operation

{ Warning

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

Caution

Driving with an open andunsecured liftgate may result indamage to the power liftgatecomponents.

If equipped, the switch is on theoverhead console. The vehicle mustbe in P (Park).

The modes are:

MAX : Opens to maximum height.

3/4 : Opens to a reduced height thatcan be set from 3/4 to fully open.Use to prevent the liftgate fromopening into overhead objects suchas a garage door or roof-mountedcargo. The liftgate can be openedall the way manually.

OFF : Opens manually only.

To open or close the liftgate, selectMAX or 3/4 mode and then:

. Pressb twice quickly on theRKE transmitter until the liftgatemoves.

. Press8 on the overheadconsole. The driver door mustbe unlocked.

. Press the touch pad on theunderside of the liftgate handleafter unlocking all doors.If equipped with Keyless Access,a locked vehicle can be openedif the RKE transmitter is within1 m (3 ft) of the touch pad.



. Pressl on the bottom edge ofthe liftgate next to the latch toclose.

Press any liftgate button, the touchpad, orb on the RKE transmitterwhile the liftgate is moving to stop it.Pressing any liftgate button orpressingb twice quickly on theRKE transmitter restarts theoperation in the reverse direction.Pressing the touch pad on theliftgate handle will restart themotion, but only in the openingdirection.

Caution

Manually forcing the liftgate toopen or close during a powercycle can damage the vehicle.Allow the power cycle tocomplete.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled in extremelylow temperatures, or after repeatedpower cycling over a short period of

time. If this occurs, the liftgate canstill be operated manually. SelectOFF on the liftgate switch.

If the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park) while the power function isin progress, the liftgate will continueto completion. If the vehicle isaccelerated before the liftgate hascompleted moving, the liftgate maystop or reverse direction. Check forDriver Information Center (DIC)messages and make sure theliftgate is closed and latched beforedriving.

Falling Liftgate Detection

If the power liftgate automaticallycloses after a power opening cycle,it indicates that the system isreacting to excess weight on theliftgate or a possible support strutfailure. Remove any excess weight.If the liftgate continues toautomatically close after opening,see your dealer for service beforeusing the power liftgate.

Interfering with the power liftgatemotion or manually closing theliftgate too quickly after poweropening may resemble a support

strut failure. This could also activatethe falling liftgate detection feature.Allow the liftgate to complete itsoperation and wait a few secondsbefore manually closing the liftgate.

Obstacle Detection Features

If the liftgate encounters an obstacleduring a power open or close cycle,the liftgate will automatically reversedirection and move a short distanceaway from the obstacle. Afterremoving the obstruction, the powerliftgate operation can be used again.If the liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle,the power function will deactivate.After removing the obstructions,manually close the liftgate. This willallow normal power operationfunctions to resume.

If the vehicle is locked while theliftgate is closing, and an obstacleprevents the liftgate from completelyclosing, the horn will sound as analert that the liftgate did not close.

Pinch sensors are on the sideedges of the liftgate. If an object iscaught between the liftgate and thevehicle and presses against a



sensor, the liftgate will reversedirection and stop at a partially openposition. The liftgate will remainopen until it is activated again orclosed manually.

Setting the 3/4 Mode

To change the position the liftgatestops at when opening:

1. Select MAX or 3/4 mode andopen the liftgate.

2. Stop the liftgate movement atthe desired height by pressingany liftgate button. Manuallyadjust the liftgate position ifneeded.

3. Press and holdl on thebottom edge of the liftgate nextto the latch on the outside ofthe liftgate until the turn signalsflash and a beep sounds. Thisindicates the setting has beenrecorded.

The liftgate cannot be set below aminimum programmable height.If there is no light flash or sound,then the height adjustment may betoo low.

Manual Operation

Select OFF to manually operate theliftgate. See “Manual Liftgate” at thebeginning of this section.

Caution

Attempting to move the liftgatetoo quickly and with excessiveforce may result in damage to thevehicle.

Operate the liftgate manually with asmooth motion and moderatespeed. The system includes afeature which limits the manualclosing speed to protect thecomponents.

Hands-Free Operation

If equipped with Hands-Free VehicleAccess, the liftgate may beoperated with a kicking motionunder the rear bumper.

The liftgate will not operate if theRKE transmitter is not within1 m (3 ft).

The hands-free feature will not workwhile the liftgate is moving. To stopthe liftgate while in motion use oneof the liftgate switches.



Length of Kick Zone

To operate, move your foot in aforward kicking motion under thecenter of the rear bumper, then pullit back.

Caution

Splashing water may cause theliftgate to open. Keep the RKEtransmitter away from the rearbumper detection area or turn theliftgate mode to OFF whencleaning or working near the rearbumper to avoid accidentalopening.

. Do not sweep your foot sideto side.

. Do not keep your foot under thebumper; the liftgate will notactivate.

. Do not touch the liftgate until ithas stopped moving.

. This feature may be temporarilydisabled under some conditions.If the liftgate does not respond tothe kick, open or close theliftgate by another method orstart the vehicle. The feature willbe re-enabled.

When closing the liftgate using thisfeature, there will be a short delay.The rear lights will flash and achime will sound. Step away fromthe liftgate before it starts moving.

Power Assist Steps

{ Warning

Never place hands or other bodyparts between the deployedpower assist steps and thevehicle. You or others could beseriously injured.

{ Warning

Never step on a moving assiststep. You or others could beseriously injured.

Disable the power assist stepsbefore jacking or placing any objectunder the vehicle. Too much icebuildup may prevent deployment ofthe power assist steps. Check thestep position before exiting the



power assist steps, clear the ice,then enable the assist steps andconfirm normal function prior to use.

Keep hands, children, pets, objects,and clothing clear of the powerassist steps when in motion. Thesteps will reverse direction if theyencounter an obstruction whenopening or closing. Remove theobstruction, then open and close thedoor on the same side to completethe motion of the assist steps. If theobstruction is not cleared, the assiststeps remain extended while driving.

To extend both power assist stepsfor cleaning, pressj while thevehicle is in P (Park) or N (Neutral).Pressj again to retract them.The DIC will display a message.

Enable/Disable

Press and holdj for four secondsto lock and disable the power assiststeps. Press and holdj forfour seconds again to enable them.The DIC will display a message.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm System

The indicator light, on theinstrument panel near thewindshield, indicates the status ofthe system.

Off : Alarm system is disarmed.

On Solid : Vehicle is securedduring the delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash : Vehicle is unsecured.A door, liftgate, or the hood is open.

Slow Flash : Alarm system isarmed.



Arming the Alarm System

1. Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle in one ofthree ways:

. Use the RKE transmitter.

. Use the Keyless Accesssystem.

. With a door open, press Qon the interior of the door.

3. After 30 seconds the alarmsystem will arm, and theindicator light will begin toslowly flash. Pressing Q on theRKE transmitter a second timewill bypass the 30-seconddelay and immediately arm thealarm system.

The vehicle alarm system will notarm if the doors are locked withthe key.

If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking with the RKEtransmitter, the horn will chirp andthe lights will flash to indicatepre-alarm. If the vehicle is notstarted, or the door is not unlocked

by pressing K on the RKEtransmitter during the 10-secondpre-alarm, the alarm will beactivated.

The alarm will also be activated if apassenger door, the liftgate, or thehood is opened without firstdisarming the system. When thealarm is activated, the turn signalsflash and the horn sounds for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

Disarming the Alarm System

To disarm the alarm system or turnoff the alarm if it has been activated:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Unlock the vehicle using theKeyless Access system.

. Start the vehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

. Lock the vehicle after alloccupants have exited.

. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter, or use theKeyless Access system.

Unlocking the driver door withthe key will not disarm thesystem or turn off the alarm.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed on the RKEtransmitter and the horn chirps threetimes, an alarm occurred previouslywhile the alarm system was armed.

If the alarm has been activated, amessage will appear on the DIC.

Power Sounder, InclinationSensor, and Intrusion Sensor

In addition to the standardtheft-deterrent system features, thissystem may also have a powersounder, inclination sensor, andintrusion sensor.

The power sounder provides anaudible alarm which is distinct fromthe vehicle’s horn. It has its ownpower source, and can sound analarm if the vehicle’s battery iscompromised.



The inclination sensor can set offthe alarm if it senses movement ofthe vehicle, such as a change invehicle orientation.

The intrusion sensor monitors thevehicle interior, and can activate thealarm if it senses unauthorized entryinto the vehicle’s interior. Do notallow passengers or pets to remainin the vehicle when the intrusionsensor is activated.

Before arming the theft-deterrentsystem and activating the intrusionsensor:

. Make sure all doors andwindows are completely closed.

. Secure any loose items such asa sunshades.

. Make sure there are noobstructions blocking thesensors in the front overheadconsole.

. Close DVD screens beforeleaving the vehicle.

Intrusion and InclinationSensors Disable Switch

It is recommended that the intrusionand inclination sensors bedeactivated if pets are left in thevehicle or the vehicle is beingtransported.

With the vehicle off, presso inthe front overhead console to turnoff the feature.

The indicator light will come onmomentarily, indicating that thesesensors have been disabled untilthe next time the alarm system isarmed.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement0 396.

Immobilizer Operation

This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the vehicle isturned off.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the ignition is turnedfrom off to on.

The security light, in the instrumentcluster, comes on if there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.



When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. It may benecessary to check the fuse. SeeFuses and Circuit Breakers 0 309.If the engine still does not start withthe other key, the vehicle needsservice. If the vehicle does start, thefirst key may be faulty. See yourdealer.

It is possible for the immobilizersystem to learn new or replacementkeys. Up to eight keys can beprogrammed for the vehicle. Toprogram additional keys, see Keys(Keyless Access) 0 27 or Keys (KeyAccess) 0 28. To program additionaltransmitters, see your dealer.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the vehicletheft system in the vehicle.

See your dealer to get a new keyblank cut exactly as the ignition keythat operates the system.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.



Power Mirrors

Shown with Power FoldingMirrors, Manual Folding Similar

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press (1) or (2) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.The indicator light comes on.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move the mirror up,down, right, or left.

3. Adjust the outside mirror sothat the side of the vehicle andthe area behind are seen.

4. Press either (1) or (2) again todeselect the mirror. Theindicator light goes off.

Exterior Automatic DimmingMirror

If equipped, the driver outside mirrorautomatically adjusts for the glare ofheadlamps behind. This featurecomes on when the vehicle isstarted. See Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror 0 56.

Turn Signal Indicator

The vehicle may also have a turnsignal indicator on the mirror. Anarrow on the mirror flashes in thedirection of the turn or lane change.

Folding Mirrors

Power Folding

To adjust power folding mirrors,if equipped:

1. Press{ to fold the mirrorsinward.

2. Press{ again to return themirrors to the driving position.

Resetting the Power FoldingMirrors

Reset the power folding mirrors if:

. The mirrors are accidentallyobstructed while folding.



. They are accidentally manuallyfolded/unfolded.

. The mirrors will not stay in theunfolded position.

. The mirrors vibrate at normaldriving speeds.

Fold and unfold the mirrors one timeusing the mirror controls to resetthem to their normal position.A popping noise may be heardduring the resetting of the powerfolding mirrors. This sound is normalafter a manual folding operation.

Manual Folding

Fold the mirrors inward to preventdamage when going through anautomatic car wash. To fold, pull themirror toward the vehicle. Push themirror outward, to return to itsoriginal position.

Heated MirrorsK : Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 180.

Automatic DimmingMirrorIf the vehicle has the automaticdimming mirror, the driver outsidemirror automatically adjusts for theglare of the headlamps from behind.

Blind Spot MirrorsIf equipped, there is a small convexmirror built into the upper and outercorner of the driver outside mirror.It can show objects that may be inthe vehicle's blind zone.

Driving with the Blind SpotMirror

Actual Mirror View



1. When the approaching vehicleis a long distance away, theimage in the main mirror issmall and near the inboardedge of the mirror.

2. As the vehicle gets closer, theimage in the main mirror getslarger and moves outboard.

3. As the vehicle enters the blindzone, the image transitionsfrom the main mirror to theblind spot mirror.

4. When the vehicle is in the blindzone, the image only appearsin the blind spot mirror.

Using the Outside Mirror withthe Blind Spot Mirror

1. Set the main mirror so that theside of the vehicle can just beseen and the blind spot mirrorhas an unobstructed view.

2. When checking for traffic orbefore changing a lane, look atthe main driver/passenger sidemirror to observe traffic in theadjacent lane, behind yourvehicle. Check the blind spotmirror for a vehicle in the blind

zone. Then, glance over yourshoulder to double checkbefore moving slowly into theadjacent lane.

Reverse Tilt MirrorsIf equipped with memory seats, thepassenger and/or driver mirror tiltsto a preselected position when thevehicle is in R (Reverse). Thisallows the curb to be seen whenparallel parking.

The mirror(s) return to the originalposition when:

. The vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or remains inR (Reverse) for about30 seconds.

. The ignition is turned off.

. The vehicle is driven inR (Reverse) above a set speed.

To turn this feature on or off, seeVehicle Personalization 0 158.

Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

If equipped with OnStar, the vehiclemay have three control buttons atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information aboutOnStar and how to subscribe to it.See OnStar Overview 0 400.

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Manual Rearview MirrorIf equipped with a manual rearviewmirror, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it for nighttimeuse to avoid glare from theheadlamps from behind.



Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorIf equipped, automatic dimmingreduces the glare of headlampsfrom behind. The dimming featurecomes on when the vehicle isstarted.

Child-View Mirror

If equipped, the child-view mirror ison the overhead console. Press thefixed button on the cover to release.Push the mirror back up when notin use.

Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in a

pulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter or keys in avehicle with children. When thereare children in the rear seat, usethe window lockout button toprevent operation of the windows.See Keys (Keyless Access) 0 27or Keys (Key Access) 0 28.



The power windows work when theignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 212.

Using the window switch, press toopen or pull to close the window.

The windows may be temporarilydisabled if they are used repeatedlywithin a short time.

Window Lockout

This feature stops the rearpassenger window switches fromworking.

. PressZ to engage the rearwindow lockout feature. Theindicator light is on whenengaged.

. PressZ again to disengage.

Window Express Movement

All windows can be opened withoutholding the window switch. Pressthe switch down fully and quicklyrelease to express open thewindow.

If equipped, pull the window switchup fully and quickly release toexpress close the window.

Briefly press or pull the windowswitch in the same direction to stopthat window’s express movement.

Window Automatic ReversalSystem

The express-close feature willreverse window movement if itcomes in contact with an object.Extreme cold or ice could cause thewindow to auto-reverse. Thewindow will operate normally afterthe object or condition is removed.

Automatic Reversal SystemOverride

{ Warning

If automatic reversal systemoverride is active, the window willnot reverse automatically. You orothers could be injured and thewindow could be damaged.Before using automatic reversalsystem override, make sure thatall people and obstructions areclear of the window path.



When the engine is on, override theautomatic reversal system by pullingand holding the window switch ifconditions prevent it from closing.

Programming the PowerWindows

Programming may be necessary ifthe vehicle battery has beendisconnected or discharged. If thewindow is unable to express-up,program each express-closewindow:

1. Close all doors.

2. Turn the ignition on or to ACC/ACCESSORY.

3. Partially open the window to beprogrammed. Then close it andcontinue to pull the switchbriefly after the window hasfully closed.

4. Open the window and continueto press the switch briefly afterthe window has fully opened.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow and, if equipped, extendalong the rod.

Roof

Sunroof

1. SLIDE Switch2. TILT Switch

If equipped, the sunroof onlyoperates when the ignition is on orin ACC/ACCESSORY, or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 212.



Slide Switch

Express-Open/Express-Close : Toexpress-open the sunroof, fullypress and release I (1). Toexpress-close the sunroof, fullypress and releaseK (1). Pressthe switch again to stop themovement.

Open/Close (Manual Mode) : Toopen the sunroof, press and hold I(1). Release the switch at thedesired position. Press and holdK (1) to close the sunroof.Release the switch at the desiredposition.

Tilt Switch

Vent : From the closed position,pressJ (2) to vent the sunroof.

PressK (2) to close thesunroof vent.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise.The air deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadewhich can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually whenthe sunroof is in the vent or fullyclosed position.

Automatic Reversal System

The sunroof has an automaticreversal system that is only activewhen the sunroof is operated inexpress-close mode.

If an object is in the path whileexpress closing, the reversal systemwill detect an object, stop, and openthe sunroof again.

If frost or other conditions preventclosing, override the feature byclosing the sunroof in manual mode.To stop movement, release theswitch.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.

If water is seen dripping into thewater drainage system, this isnormal.


60 Seats and Restraints

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Front SeatsPower Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . 62Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 63Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Seat BeltsSeat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Seat Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 83Seat Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Replacing Seat Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . 86When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Passenger Sensing System . . . 91Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 95

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . 96Replacing Airbag System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Infants and Young Children . . . . 98Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . 101Where to Put the Restraint . . . 102

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) . . . 104

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . 111

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in theRear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the CenterFront Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the FrontPassenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . 114


Seats and Restraints 61

Head RestraintsFront Seats

The vehicle’s front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.



Second Row Seats

The vehicle's second row seatshave head restraints in the outboardseating positions that cannot beadjusted.

The second row seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.

Third Row Seats

The third row seat head restraintcan be lowered to allow for bettervisibility when the rear seat isunoccupied.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button located on the top of theseatback and push the headrestraint down.

Return the lowered head restraint tothe upright position until it locks intoplace. Push and pull on the headrestraint to make sure it is locked.

If you are installing a child restraintin the third row seat, see “Securinga Child Restraint Designed for theLATCH System” under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 104.

Front Seats

Power Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.



To adjust the seat:

. Move the seat forward orrearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks 0 63.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment 0 63.

Some vehicles are equipped with afeature that activates a vibratingpulse alert in the driver seat to helpthe driver avoid crashes. See DriverAssistance Systems 0 242.

Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust the lumbar support:

. Press and hold the controlforward to increase or rearwardto decrease upper and lowerlumbar support at the same time.

. Press and hold the control up toincrease upper lumbar supportand decrease lower lumbarsupport.

Press and hold the control downto increase lower lumbar supportand decrease upper lumbarsupport.

Reclining Seatbacks


. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the seat belts cannot dotheir job.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear theseat belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Memory Seats

If equipped, memory seats allow twodrivers to store and recall theirunique seat positions for driving thevehicle, and a shared exit positionfor getting out of the vehicle. Otherfeature positions may also be set,such as power mirrors, powersteering wheel, and adjustablepedals, if equipped. Memorypositions are linked to RKEtransmitter 1 or 2 for automaticmemory recalls.

Before storing, adjust all availablememory feature positions. Turn theignition on and then press andrelease SET; a beep will sound.Then immediately press and hold 1,2, orB (Exit) on the driver dooruntil two beeps sound. To manuallyrecall these positions, press andhold 1, 2, orB until the savedposition is reached.

The vehicle identifies the currentdriver’s RKE transmitter number(1–8).



See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access)0 31 or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeylessAccess) 0 33. Only RKEtransmitters 1 and 2 can be used forautomatic memory recalls. A DriverInformation Center (DIC) welcomemessage indicating the transmitternumber may display for the first fewignition cycles following atransmitter change. For AutoMemory Recall to work properly,save the positions to the memorybutton (1 or 2) matching the RKEtransmitter number displayed in theDIC welcome message. Carry thelinked RKE transmitter whenentering the vehicle.

Vehicle Personalization Settings

. To have the Auto Memory Recallmovement begin when thevehicle is started, select theSettings menu, then Vehicle,then Comfort and Convenience,and then Auto Memory Recall.Select On or Off. See “AutoMemory Recall” later in thissection.

. To begin Easy Exit Recallmovement when the ignition isturned off and the driver door isopened, or when the ignition isturned off with the driver dooralready opened, select theSettings menu, then Vehicle,then Comfort and Convenience,and then Easy Exit Options.Select On or Off. See “Easy ExitRecall” later in this section.

. See Vehicle Personalization0 158 for additional settinginformation.

Identifying Driver Number

To identify the driver number:

1. Start the vehicle with the otherkey or RKE transmitter. TheDIC should display the drivernumber; 1 or 2. Turn theignition off and remove the keyor RKE transmitter from thevehicle.

2. Start the vehicle with the initialkey or RKE transmitter. TheDIC should display the otherdriver number not shown instep 1.

Saving Memory Positions

Read these instructions completelybefore saving memory positions.

To save preferred driving positions1 and 2:

1. Turn the ignition on or to ACC/ACCESSORY.

A DIC welcome message maybe displayed indicating number1 or 2 for memory recalls.

2. Adjust all available memoryfeatures to the desired drivingposition.

3. Press and release SET; a beepwill sound.

4. Immediately press and hold the1 or 2 memory button matchingthe above DIC welcomemessage until two beepssound.

If too much time passesbetween releasing SET andpressing 1, the memoryposition will not be saved andtwo beeps will not sound.Repeat Steps 3 and 4.



1 or 2 corresponds to the drivernumber. See “Identifying DriverNumber” in this section.

5. Repeat Steps 1–4 for a seconddriver using 1 or 2.

To save positions forB and easyexit features, repeat Steps 1–4usingB. This stores the positionsfor getting out of the vehicle.

Save preferred memory featurepositions to both 1 and 2 if you arethe only driver.

Manually Recalling MemoryPositions

Press and hold 1, 2, orB to recallthe previously stored memorypositions.

To stop manual recall movement,release 1, 2, orB. Recall can alsobe stopped by pressing a powerseat, SET, power mirror control,power steering wheel control,or adjustable pedal control,if memory equipped. The driver orpassenger side mirror must beselected.

Auto Memory Recall

The vehicle identifies the number ofthe current driver’s RKE transmitter(1–8).See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access)0 31 or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeylessAccess) 0 33. If the RKE transmitteris 1 or 2, and Auto Memory Recall isprogrammed on in vehiclepersonalization, the positions savedto the same memory button number1 or 2 are automatically recalledwhen the ignition is turned on,or turned from off to ACC/ACCESSORY. RKE transmitters 3–8will not provide automatic memoryrecalls.

To turn Auto Memory Recall on oroff, see "Vehicle PersonalizationSettings" previously in this sectionand Vehicle Personalization 0 158.

The transmission must be inP (Park) to initiate Auto MemoryRecall. Auto Memory Recall willcomplete if the vehicle is shifted outof P (Park) prior to reaching thestored memory position.

To stop Auto Memory Recallmovement, turn the ignition off orpress any of the following memorycontrols:

. Power seat

. Memory SET, 1, 2, orB

. Power mirror, with the driver orpassenger side mirror selected

. Power steering wheel,if equipped

. Adjustable pedals, if equipped

If the stored memory seat positiondoes not automatically recall orrecalls to the wrong positions, thedriver’s RKE transmitter number (1or 2) may not match the memorybutton number that positions weresaved to. Try storing the position tothe other memory button or try theother RKE transmitter.

Easy Exit Recall

Easy Exit Recall is not linked to anRKE transmitter. The position storedtoB is used for all drivers. To turnEasy Exit Recall on or off, see



"Vehicle Personalization Settings"previously in this section andVehicle Personalization 0 158.

If turned on, the positions saved toB are automatically recalled whenone of the following occurs:

. The vehicle is turned off and thedriver door is opened within ashort time.

. The vehicle is turned off with thedriver door open.

To stop Easy Exit Recall movement,press any of the following memorycontrols:

. Power seat

. Memory SET, 1, 2, orB

. Power mirror, with the driver orpassenger side mirror selected

. Power steering wheel,if equipped

. Adjustable pedals, if equipped

Obstructions

If something has blocked the driverseat and/or power steering wheelwhile recalling a memory position,

the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction and try the recall again.If the memory position still does notrecall, see your dealer for service.

Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ Warning

If temperature change or pain tothe skin cannot be felt, the seatheater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, use carewhen using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

The buttons are on the center stackbelow the climate control system. Tooperate, the engine must berunning.

PressI to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.

Press J to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press C to ventilate the driver orpassenger seat.

The indicator light on the buttoncomes on when this feature is on.



Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The indicator lightsnext to the buttons indicate three forthe highest setting and one for thelowest. If the heated seats are onhigh for an extended time, their levelmay automatically be lowered.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Auto Heated andVentilated Seats

During a remote start, the heated orventilated seats can be turned onautomatically. When it is coldoutside, the heated seats turn on,and when it is hot outside theventilated seats turn on. The heatedor ventilated seats are canceledwhen the ignition is turned on. Pressthe heated or ventilated seat buttonto use the heated or ventilated seatsafter the vehicle is started.

The heated or ventilated seatindicator lights do not turn on duringa remote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated or ventilated seats willnot turn on during a remote startunless they are enabled in thevehicle personalization menu.See Remote Vehicle Start 0 39 andVehicle Personalization 0 158.

Rear SeatsRear Seat Reminder

If equipped, the message REARSEAT REMINDER LOOK IN REARSEAT displays under certainconditions indicating there may bean item or passenger in the rearseat. Check before exiting thevehicle.

This feature will activate when asecond row door is opened whilethe vehicle is on or up to 10 minutesbefore the vehicle is turned on.There will be an alert when thevehicle is turned off. The alert doesnot directly detect objects in the rearseat; instead, under certainconditions, it detects when a reardoor is opened and closed,indicating that there may besomething in the rear seat.

The feature is active only once eachtime the vehicle is turned on and off,and will require reactivation byopening and closing the second rowdoors. There may be an alert evenwhen there is nothing in the rearseat; for example, if a child entered



the vehicle through the rear doorand left the vehicle without thevehicle being shut off.

The feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization 0 158.

Heated Rear Seats

{ Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns.See the Warning under Heatedand Ventilated Front Seats 0 67.

The buttons are on the rear of thecenter console.

Press M or L to heat the leftoutboard or right outboard seatcushion.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the heated seat changesto the next lower setting, and thenthe off setting. Indicator lights on thebutton show the setting: three forhigh, two for medium, and onefor low.

If the heated seats are on high foran extended time, their level mayautomatically be lowered.

Second Row Seats

Reclining Seatbacks


1. Lift the lever on the outboardside of the seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked.



{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully whileapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.If the lever is lifted withoutapplying pressure, the seat willrelease to a folded position.

2. Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked.

The second row seats can be foldedfor additional cargo space or foldedand tumbled for easy entry and exitto the third row seat.

Manual Fold and TumbleFeature

{ Warning

Do not leave the second row seatin a tumbled position while thevehicle is in motion. A tumbledseat is not locked. It can movewhen the vehicle is in motion.People in the vehicle could beinjured in a sudden stop or crash.Be sure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position beforedriving the vehicle. Push and pullon the seat to make sure it islocked into place.

Caution

Folding a rear seat with the seatbelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the seatbelts. Always unbuckle the seatbelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat

To fold and tumble the seat:

1. Make sure that there is nothingunder, in front of, or onthe seat.

2. Lift the lever, on the outboardside of the seat, to release theseatback.



The seatback will fold forwardto create a flat load floor.

If the seatback cannot fold flat,try moving the front seatforward and/or put the frontseatback in the uprightposition.

3. Lift the lever again to releasethe rear of the seat from thefloor. The seat will tumbleforward.

4. The rear pull strap can also beused to fold or fold and tumblethe seat. It is easier to tumblethe seat with the rear pull straponce the seat is folded flat.

Folding and Tumbling the Seatfrom the Third Row Seat

{ Warning

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or folded and tumbled,could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to returnthe seat to the passenger seatingposition. Push and pull on theseat to make sure it is locked intoplace.

To fold and tumble the seat from thethird row seat:




2. Pull the strap on the bottomrear of the second row seat torelease the seatback. Theseatback will fold forward.

3. Pull the strap again to releasethe rear of the seat from thefloor. The seat will tumbleforward.

Automatic Fold and TumbleFeature

{ Warning

Do not leave the second row seatin a tumbled position while thevehicle is in motion. A tumbledseat is not locked. It can movewhen the vehicle is in motion.People in the vehicle could beinjured in a sudden stop or crash.Be sure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position beforedriving the vehicle. Push and pullon the seat to make sure it islocked into place.

{ Warning

Automatically folding andtumbling the seat when someoneis sitting in the seat, could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always make sure there is no onesitting in the seat before pressingthe automatic seat release switch.

Caution


The transmission must be inP (Park) for this feature to work.

Fold the seat to load cargo. Foldand tumble the seat for entry to thethird row.



Folding and Tumbling the Seat

To fold and tumble the seat:


Driver Side Rear Panel Switch

2. Press the automatic seatrelease switch on the panelbehind the rear doors. Theseatback automaticallyfolds flat.

3. Press the switch again torelease the rear of the seatfrom the floor. The seat willtumble forward.

Folding and Tumbling the Seatfrom the Cargo Area

1. Second Row Power SeatSwitches

2. Third Row Power SeatSwitches

To fold and tumble the seat from thecargo area:


2. Press the switch (1) on the sidetrim of the cargo area to foldthe seatback.

The left switch folds the leftseatback, and the right switchfolds the right seatback.

3. Press the switch again torelease the rear of the seatfrom the floor. The seat willtumble forward.

The switches (2) can be used to foldand unfold the third row seatbacksfrom the cargo area. See Third RowSeats 0 74.

Returning the Seat to theSitting Position

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.



To return the seat to the sittingposition from the tumbled position:

1. Pull the seat down until bothsides of the seat are latched tothe floor. Make sure the seat issecurely latched to the floorbefore raising the seatback.If both sides are not latched tothe floor, the seatback will notraise.

2. Lift the seatback and push itrearward. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure it islocked.

Third Row Seats

Folding the Seatback

Caution


The transmission must be inP (Park) for this feature to work.

The third row seatbacks can befolded to increase cargo space.

1. Second Row Power SeatFold and Tumble Switches

2. Third Row Power Seat Foldand Raise Switches

To fold the seatback:

1. Open the liftgate to access thecontrols for the third row seat.


3. Fully lower the head restraints.See Head Restraints 0 61. Putthe second row seatback in theupright position. See SecondRow Seats 0 69.

4. Disconnect the rear seat beltmini-latch, using a key in theslot on the mini-buckle, and letthe belt retract into theheadliner.



5. Stow the mini-latch in theholder in the headliner.

6. Press and hold the switch (2)on the side trim of the cargoarea to fold the third rowseatback.

The left switch folds the leftseatback, and the right switchfolds the right seatback.

7. Repeat the steps for the otherseatback, if desired.

The switches (1) can be used to foldor fold and tumble the second rowseats from the cargo area. SeeSecond Row Seats 0 69.

Returning the Third RowSeatback to the UprightPosition

1. Second Row Power SeatFold and Tumble Switches

2. Third Row Power Seat Foldand Raise Switches

To return the third row seatback tothe upright position:

1. Open the liftgate to access thecontrols for the seat.

2. Press and hold the switch (2)on the side trim of the cargoarea to raise the third rowseatback.

The left switch raises the leftseatback, and the right switchraises the right seatback.

{ Warning

A seat belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the seat belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

3. Reconnect the center seat beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle.Do not let it twist.

4. Pull on the seat belt to be surethe mini-latch is secure.

5. Repeat the steps for the otherseatback, if desired.



Seat BeltsThis section describes how to useseat belts properly, and some thingsnot to do.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where aseat belt cannot be worn properly.In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingseat belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingseat belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allow

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and seat belts.

Always wear a seat belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the seat belts.See Seat Belt Reminders 0 140.

Why Seat Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the seat belts!

When you wear a seat belt, you andthe vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the seatbelts. That is why wearing seat beltsmakes such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSeat Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing aseat belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a seat belt or not. Yourchance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.



Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear seatbelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only. They work withseat belts— not instead of them.Whether or not an airbag isprovided, all occupants still haveto buckle up to get the mostprotection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing seat belts.

How to Wear Seat BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout seat belts and children, andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren 0 97 or Infants and YoungChildren 0 98. Follow those rules foreveryone's protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing seat belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a seat belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strong

pelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour seat belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulderbelt under both arms orbehind your back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.



Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt except forthe center front passenger position,if equipped, which has a lap belt.See Lap Belt 0 83.

If you are using a rear seatingposition with a detachable seat belt,and the seat belt is not attached,see Third Row Seats 0 74 forinstructions on reconnecting theseat belt to the mini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see“Seats” in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not letit get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lockif you pull the belt across youvery quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly tounlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may beengaged. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the wayand start again.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the frontoutboard seating position mayaffect the passenger sensingsystem. See PassengerSensing System 0 91.

For front seating positions,if the webbing locks in the latchplate before it reaches thebuckle, tilt the latch plate flat tounlock.



3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks. If the latchplate will not go fully into thebuckle, check if the correctbuckle is being used.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If thebelt is not long enough, seeSeat Belt Extender 0 83.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”

in this section for instructionson use and important safetyinformation.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

For third row seats, it may benecessary to pull stitching onthe seat belt through the latchplate to fully tighten the lap belton smaller occupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

For third row seats, slide the latchplate up the safety webbing whenthe seat belt is not in use. The latchplate should rest on the stitching onthe seat belt.

Always stow the seat belt slowly.If the seat belt webbing returnsquickly to the stowed position, theretractor may lock and cannot bepulled out. If this happens, pull theseat belt straight out firmly to unlockthe webbing, and then release it.If the webbing is still locked in theretractor, see your dealer.



Before a door is closed, be sure theseat belt is out of the way. If a dooris slammed against a seat belt,damage can occur to both the seatbelt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andfront outboard passenger positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe seat belt in a crash. See How toWear Seat Belts Properly 0 77.

Push down on the release button tomove the height adjuster to thedesired position.

Move the adjuster up by pushing upon the shoulder belt guide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.

Seat Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has seat beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the seat beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the seat belt assembly.

They can help tighten the seat beltsduring the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. Seat beltpretensioners can also help tightenthe seat belts in a side crash or arollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's seat beltsystem will need to be replaced.See Replacing Seat Belt SystemParts after a Crash 0 84.

Do not sit on the outboard seat beltwhile entering or exiting the vehicleor at any time while sitting in theseat. Sitting on the seat belt candamage the webbing and hardware.



Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides

{ Warning

A seat belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

Rear seat belt comfort guides mayprovide added seat belt comfort forolder children who have outgrownbooster seats and for some adults.When installed on a shoulder belt,the comfort guide positions theshoulder belt away from the neckand head.

Second Row Outboard SeatingPositions

The vehicle has comfort guides forthe second row outboard seatingpositions. The comfort guides arestored on a clip on the interior trimnext to the outboard seatback.

To install:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage clip on the interior trimnext to the outboard seatback.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.



3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be behind thebelt with the plastic guide onthe front.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe seat belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the seat belt can beremoved from the guide. Slide theguide onto its storage clip.

Third Row Seating Positions

Comfort guides are availablethrough your dealer for third rowseating positions. Instructions areincluded with the guides.

Seat Belt Use DuringPregnancySeat belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear seat belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a seatbelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making seatbelts effective is wearing themproperly.



Lap BeltThis section is only for the lap belt.To learn how to wear a lap-shoulderbelt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 78.

The vehicle may have a centerseating position with a lap seat belt.The lap seat belt does not have aretractor.

To make the belt longer, tilt the latchplate and pull it along the belt.

Buckle, position, and release it thesame way as the lap part of alap-shoulder belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its freeend as shown until the belt is snug.

If the belt is not long enough, seeSeat Belt Extender 0 83.

Make sure the release button on thebuckle is positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the seat beltquickly if necessary.

If you find that the latch plate willnot go fully into the buckle, see ifyou are using the correct buckle. Besure that the latch plate clicks wheninserted into the buckle.

Seat Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's seat belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a seat belt is not long enough,your dealer will order you anextender. When you go in to order it,take the heaviest coat you will wear,so the extender will be long enoughfor you. To help avoid personalinjury, do not let someone else useit, and use it only for the seat it ismade to fit. The extender has beendesigned for adults. Never use it forsecuring child restraints. For moreinformation on the proper use and fitof seat belt extenders see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckPeriodically check the seat beltreminder, seat belts, buckles, latchplates, retractors, shoulder beltheight adjusters (if equipped), andseat belt anchorages to make surethey are all in working order. Lookfor any other loose or damaged seatbelt system parts that might keep aseat belt system from performing



properly. See your dealer to have itrepaired. Torn or frayed seat beltsmay not protect you in a crash.They can rip apart under impactforces. If a belt is torn or frayed,have it replaced immediately.

Make sure the seat belt reminderlight is working. See Seat BeltReminders 0 140.

Keep seat belts clean and dry. SeeSeat Belt Care 0 84.

Seat Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, theymight not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean andrinse seat belt webbing only withmild soap and lukewarm water.Allow the webbing to dry.

Seat belts should be properly caredfor and maintained.

Seat belt hardware should be keptdry and free of dust or debris. Asnecessary exterior hard surfacesand seat belt webbing may be lightlycleaned with mild soap and water.Ensure there is not excessive dustor debris in the mechanism. If dustor debris exists in the system pleasesee the dealer. Parts may need tobe replaced to ensure properfunctionality of the system.

Replacing Seat BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the seat beltsystem in the vehicle. A damagedseat belt system may not properlyprotect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the seat belt systems areworking properly after a crash,have them inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofseat belts may not be necessary.But the seat belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the seatbelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the seat beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the seat belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 141.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:

. A frontal airbag for the driver

. A frontal airbag for the frontoutboard passenger

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the front outboardpassenger

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand for the second and third rowpassengers seated directlybehind the driver

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thesecond and third rowpassengers seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger

The vehicle may have the followingairbag:

. A front center airbag for thedriver and front outboardpassenger

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on anattached label near the deploymentopening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For the front center airbag, the wordAIRBAG is on the inboard side ofthe driver seatback.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by seatbelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your seat belt, even withairbags. Airbags are designed towork with seat belts, not replacethem. Also, airbags are notdesigned to inflate in every crash.In some crashes seat belts arethe only restraint. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? 0 88.

Wearing your seat belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe seat belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a seat beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Seat belts help keep youin position before and during acrash. Always wear a seat belt,even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle. The seat belts andthe front outboard passengerairbags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back andupright in the seat with both feeton the floor.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the front centerarmrest or console in vehicleswith a front center airbag.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children 0 97 orInfants and Young Children 0 98.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 141.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.



The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.

If the vehicle has a front centerairbag, it is in the inboard side of thedriver seatback.


The driver and front outboardpassenger seat-mounted sideimpact airbags are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.


The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, andsecond and third row outboardseating positions are in the ceilingabove the side windows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of an

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

inflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat or consoleaccessories that block theinflation path of a seat-mountedside impact airbag or the frontcenter airbag, if equipped.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie-downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped withairbags. See Airbag System 0 85.Airbags are designed to inflate if the

impact exceeds the specific airbagsystem's deployment threshold.Deployment thresholds are used topredict how severe a crash is likelyto be in time for the airbags toinflate and help restrain theoccupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors that help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, and

whether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasadvanced technology frontalairbags. Advanced technologyfrontal airbags adjust the restraintaccording to crash severity.

The vehicle also has a seat positionsensor that enables the sensingsystem to monitor the position of thedriver seat. The seat position sensorprovides information that is used toadjust the deployment of the driverfrontal airbag.

The front center airbag, if equipped,is designed to inflate in moderate tosevere side crashes dependingupon the location of the impact,when either side of the vehicle isstruck. In addition, the front centerairbag is designed to inflate whenthe sensing system predicts that thevehicle is about to roll over on itsside. The front center airbag is not



designed to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,or rear impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes dependingon the location of the impact.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not designed to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis designed to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof-rail airbags are designed toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Roof-railairbags are not designed to inflate inrear impacts. Both roof-rail airbagswill inflate when either side of thevehicle is struck, if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over on its side, or in asevere frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or the repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? 0 86.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by seat belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst, second, and third rows. Therollover capable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? 0 88.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto seat belts.



What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After frontal and seat-mounted sideimpact airbags inflate, they quicklydeflate, so quickly that some peoplemay not even realize the airbagsinflated. The front center airbag androof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 86.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.The feature may also activate,without airbag inflation, after anevent that exceeds a predeterminedthreshold. After turning the ignitionoff and then on again, the fuel

system will return to normaloperation; the doors can be locked,the interior lamps can be turned off,and the hazard warning flashers canbe turned off using the controls forthose features. If any of thesesystems are damaged in the crashthey may not operate as normal.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.



Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.

. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash.See Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy 0 398 and Event DataRecorders 0 398.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the overhead consolewhen the vehicle is started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbols for on and off, will bevisible during the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON or

OFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator 0 142.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seatand seat belt. The sensors aredesigned to detect the presence ofa properly seated occupant anddetermine if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag should beallowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.



Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off thepassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If securing aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure child restraints in the rearseat. Consider using anothervehicle to transport the childwhen a rear seat is not available.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:

. The front outboard passengerseat is unoccupied.

. The system determines an infantis present in a child restraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 142.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehicle whohas outgrown child restraints should



wear a seat belt properly—whetheror not there is an airbag for thatperson.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 141 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag ifthe system determines that an infantis present in a child restraint. If achild restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the CenterFront Seat) 0 114 or SecuringChild Restraints (With the SeatBelt in the Front PassengerSeat) 0 114 or Securing ChildRestraints (With the Seat Beltin the Rear Seat) 0 112.

Make sure the seat beltretractor is locked by pullingthe shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor wheninstalling the child restraint,even if the child restraint isequipped with a seat belt lockoff. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightenedbut not pulled out of theretractor.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is stilllit, turn the vehicle off. Thenslightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatbackis not pushing the childrestraint into the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint.If this happens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraints0 61.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system mayor may not turn off the airbag for achild in a child restraint dependingupon the child’s size. It is better tosecure the child restraint in a rearseat. Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat, even if theon indicator is not lit.



If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat or that the childrestraint locking feature is engaged.Use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag:


2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such asblankets, cushions, seatcovers, seat heaters, or seatmassagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. If the shoulder portion of thebelt is pulled out all the way,the child restraint lockingfeature will be engaged. Thismay unintentionally cause thepassenger sensing system toturn the airbag off for someadult-sized occupants. If thishappens, unbuckle the belt, letthe belt go back all the way,and then buckle the belt againwithout pulling the belt out allthe way.

6. Restart the vehicle and havethe person remain in thisposition for two to three minutesafter the on indicator is lit.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag off indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Seat belts help keep the passengerin position on the seat duringvehicle maneuvers and braking,which helps the passenger sensingsystem maintain the passengerairbag status. See “Seat Belts” and“Child Restraints” in the Index foradditional information about theimportance of proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such as



seat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 95for more information aboutmodifications that can affect howthe system operates.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device, is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ Warning

Stowing articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation 0 395.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly.

The operation of the airbag systemcan also be affected by changingany parts of the front seats, seatbelts, airbag sensing and diagnosticmodule, steering wheel, instrumentpanel, inner door seals including thespeakers, any of the airbagmodules, ceiling or pillar garnishtrim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors,airbag wiring, or front centerconsole.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that are part



of the passenger's seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery, or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort enhancing pador device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System0 91.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels 0 337 for additionalimportant information.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether the

airbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Offices0 388.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 141.

Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 86. See your dealerfor service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot properly protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 141.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle’s seat belts.

The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:

. Sit all the way back on the seat.Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear seat beltcomfort guide, if available. See“Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 78.If a comfort guide is notavailable, or if the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper seat belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

If you have the choice, a childshould sit in a position with alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide.

Q: What is the proper way towear seat belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Seat Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt0 78.



According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use seat beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same seat belt. Theseat belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A seat belt mustbe used by only one person ata time.

{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear theseat belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safety



restraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the seatbelts.

Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle's seat belt system nor itsairbag system is designed for them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant or child should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the frontoutboard seat. Secure arear-facing child restraint in a rearseat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If you must secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go.



Child restraints are devices used torestrain, seat, or position children inthe vehicle and are sometimescalled child seats or car seats.

There are three basic types ofchild restraints:

. Forward-facing child restraints

. Rearward-facing child restraints

. Belt-positioning booster seats

The proper child restraint for yourchild depends on their size, weight,and age, and also on whether thechild restraint is compatible with thevehicle in which it will be used.

For each type of child restraint,there are many different modelsavailable. When purchasing a childrestraint, be sure it is designed to beused in a motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label saying thatit meets federal motor vehicle safetystandards. The restraintmanufacturer's instructions thatcome with the restraint state theweight and height limitations for aparticular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with specialneeds.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury in a crash, infants andtoddlers should be secured in arear-facing child restraint until agetwo, or until they reach themaximum height and weight limitsof their child restraint.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularseat belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Restraint

A rear-facing child restraint providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Restraint

A forward-facing child restraintprovides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

Booster Seats

A belt-positioning booster seat isused for children who haveoutgrown their forward-facing childrestraint. Boosters are designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle's seatbelt system until the child is largeenough for the vehicle seat belts tofit properly without a booster seat.See the seat belt fit test in OlderChildren 0 97.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s seat belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraints mustbe secured in vehicle seats by lapbelts or the lap belt portion of alap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCHsystem. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 104 for more information.Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in an appropriatechild restraint secured in a rearseating position.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

The vehicle may be equipped with afront center airbag in the inboardside of the driver seat. Even with afront center airbag, a child restraintcan be installed in any second rowseating position.



Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front. This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is sogreat if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thefront passenger airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System0 91 for additional information.

{ Warning

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.

When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent seat belts orLATCH anchors for additionalpassengers or child restraints.Adjacent seating positions shouldnot be used if the child restraintprevents access to or interferes withthe routing of the seat belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the childrestraint system and secure thechild restraint system properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to



properly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. The LATCH system isdesigned to make installation of achild restraint easier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s seat belts. Do not useboth the seat belts and the LATCHanchorage system to secure arear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’s seatbelts to secure the child and thebooster seat. If the manufacturerrecommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or the seatbelts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

The LATCH anchorage system canbe used until the combined weightof the child plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the seat beltalone instead of the LATCHanchorage system once thecombined weight is more than29.5 kg (65 lbs).

See Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Center FrontSeat) 0 114 or Securing ChildRestraints (With the Seat Belt in theFront Passenger Seat) 0 114 orSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 112.

Child restraints built after March2014 will be labeled with thespecific child weight up to which theLATCH system can be used toinstall the restraint.

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positionshave lower anchors. In this case,the seat belt must be used (with toptether where available) to securethe child restraint.See Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Center FrontSeat) 0 114 or Securing ChildRestraints (With the Seat Belt in theFront Passenger Seat) 0 114 orSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 112.



Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3,4) is used to securethe top of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment hook (2) on the childrestraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order toreduce the forward movement androtation of the child restraint duringdriving or in a crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a single attachmenthook (2) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use with orwithout the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Second Row— 60/40

H : Seating positions with twolower anchors.



I : Seating positions with toptether anchors.

Second Row— Bucket

H : Seating positions with twolower anchors.


Third Row Seat


To assist in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is near the top tetheranchors for second row seats. Forthird row seats, the top tetheranchor symbol is on the flipperpanel.

Second Row Seat — Bucket

For models with bucket second rowseating, the top tether anchors areat the bottom rear of the seat



cushion for each seating position inthe second row. Be sure to use ananchor on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Second Row Seat — 60/40

For models with 60/40 second rowseating, the top tether anchors areat the bottom rear of the seatcushion for each seating position inthe second row. Be sure to use ananchor on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Third Row Seat

For the third row seat, the top tetheranchors are on the back of theseatback. Move the flipper panelrearward to access the anchors. Besure to use an anchor on the sameside of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint 0 102 for additionalinformation.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

A child could be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly attachedto the vehicle using either theLATCH anchors or the vehicleseat belt. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand the instructions in thismanual.



{ Warning

To reduce the risk of serious orfatal injuries during a crash, donot attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it is

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

wrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Buckle any unused seat beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,and tighten the belt behind thechild restraint after the childrestraint has been installed.

Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s seat belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled seat belts to avoidrubbing the LATCH attachments.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

Do not fold the rear seatbackwhen the seat is occupied. Do notfold the empty rear seat with aseat belt buckled. This coulddamage the seat belt or the seat.Unbuckle and return the seat beltto its stowed position, beforefolding the seat.

The vehicle is equipped with a frontcenter airbag in the inboard side ofthe driver seat. Even with a frontcenter airbag, a child restraint canbe installed in any second rowseating position.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 102.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's seat belts. Insteaduse the vehicle's anchors and childrestraint attachments to secure the



restraints. Some restraints also useanother vehicle anchor to secure atop tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the seat belts andtop tether when recommendedby the child restraintmanufacturer. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and theinstructions in this manual. Forthe third row outboard seatingpositions, if the head restraintinterferes with the properinstallation of the childrestraint, then the headrestraint may be removed. See“Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation under LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System)0 104.

1.1. Find the lower anchorsfor the desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten thelower attachments on thechild restraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraintmanufacturer recommends thatthe top tether be attached,attach and tighten the toptether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:

2.1. Find the top tetheranchor.

For the third row seat,move the flipper panelrearward to access thetop tether anchors.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether accordingto your child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using asingle tether, route thetether over the seatback.

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetherover the seatback.



If the position you areusing has an adjustableheadrest or head restraintand you are using asingle tether, raise theheadrest or head restraintand route the tetherunder the headrest orhead restraint and inbetween the headrest orhead restraint posts.

If the position you areusing has a fixedheadrest or head restraintand you are using asingle tether, route thetether around the inboardor outboard side of theheadrest or headrestraint.

If the position you areusing has a fixed or anadjustable head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the LATCH path and attemptto move it side to side andback and forth. There shouldbe no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.



Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation

1. Partially fold the seatbackforward. See Third Row Seats0 74 for additional information.

2. Press the buttons on the headrestraint posts and pull up onthe head restraint.

3. Route the top tether of the childrestraint under the headrestraint.

4. With the head restraint facingrearward, insert the headrestraint posts into the holes inthe top of the seatback.

5. Push the head restraint down.

6. Try to move the head restraintto make sure that it is locked inplace.

7. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestraint before the seatingposition is used.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

system inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theRear Seat)When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 104 for how and where to

install the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using a seatbelt and it uses a top tether, seeLower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 104 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the seatbelt to secure the child restraint. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint 0 102.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

For the third row outboardseating positions, if the headrestraint interferes with theproper installation of the childrestraint, the head restraintmay be removed. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation” under LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System)0 104.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle's seat beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.



3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

If the latch plate will not go fullyinto the buckle, check to see ifthe correct buckle isbeing used.

Position the release button onthe buckle, away from the childrestraint system, so that theseat belt could be quicklyunbuckled if necessary.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractor

lock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. Refer to the instructionsthat came with the childrestraint and see LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System)0 104.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the seat belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.



To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

If the head restraint was removedfor a third row outboard seatingposition, reinstall it before theseating position is used. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation” under Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 104 for additionalinformation on reinstalling the headrestraint properly.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theCenter Front Seat)

{ Warning

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

center front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theFront Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 102.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.See Passenger Sensing System0 91 and Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 142 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, no system is fail-safe. Noone can guarantee that an airbag

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

will not deploy under someunusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System0 91 for additional information.

If the child restraint uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 104 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or if

the instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.Move the seat upward or theseatback to an upright position,if needed, to get a tightinstallation of the childrestraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and staylit when you start the vehicle.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 142.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle's seat beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust thebelt, if needed.



4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Position the release button onthe buckle, away from the childrestraint system, so that theseat belt could be quicklyunbuckled if necessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.



7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the seat belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

If the airbag is off, the off indicator inthe passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem 0 91.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


118 Storage

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . 118Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 118Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 119Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Center Console Storage . . . . . . 120

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . 120

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Instrument Panel Storage

If equipped with storage behind theradio, press and holdP to open.There is a USB port inside. See theinfotainment manual.

Press and holdP again to close.Keep the storage area closed whennot in use.

The storage area cannot beoperated withP when valet modeis enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

The storage area can be operatedmanually.

Glove BoxLift up the glove box handle to openit. Use the key to lock and unlockthe glove box.

CupholdersThe cupholders are immediately infront of the center console storagebin. Press the button to open. Thedoor will retract rearward.


Storage 119

If the cupholder door is closed, it willlock if the vehicle is in a crash. Seeyour dealer to have the doorunlocked.

Press the button on the forward binto open. The door will retractforward.

If equipped, cupholders may be inthe second and third row seatarmrest areas.

Sunglasses Storage

If equipped, sunglasses storage ison the overhead console. Press thefixed button on the cover andrelease to access.

Armrest StorageFor vehicles with a rear seatarmrest, pull the loop at the top ofthe armrest down to access thecupholders.

Rear Storage

There is storage in the floor of therear cargo area. Lift the handle toaccess. There is a removabledivider to help organize.


120 Storage

Center Console Storage

Pull the handle and lift to access.There are auxiliary jacks, USBports, an accessory power outlet, atote compartment, and a deviceholder inside.

On the rear of the console, there areauxiliary jacks, a High VoltagePower Outlet (HVPO), and an openstorage area.

See Power Outlets 0 127 and theinfotainment manual.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Tie-Downs

There are four cargo tie-downs inthe rear cargo area. These can beused to strap cargo down and keepit from moving inside the vehicle.

Convenience NetUse the convenience net, located inthe rear, to store small loads as farforward as possible. The net shouldnot be used to store heavy loads.

Roof Rack System

{ Warning

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— thewind can catch it while the vehicleis being driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collisionand damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMcertified accessory carrier.

If equipped, the roof rack can beused to load items. For roof racksthat do not have crossrails included,GMCertified crossrails can bepurchased as an accessory. Seeyour dealer for additionalinformation.


Storage 121

Caution

Loading cargo on the roof rackthat weighs more than 100 kg(220 lb) or hangs over the rear orsides of the vehicle may damagethe vehicle. Load cargo so that itrests evenly between thecrossrails, making sure to fastencargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking, or abrupt maneuvers,otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace.

Do not exceed the maximum vehiclecapacity when loading the vehicle.For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see VehicleLoad Limits 0 200.

A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) is located above the rearwindow glass. Make sure itemsloaded on the roof of the vehicle donot block or damage the CHMSL.


122 Instruments and Controls

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 123Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 123Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 123Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 123Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Transmission TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . 140Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . 141Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Charging System Light . . . . . . . 142Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) . . . . . . . . 143

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . 146Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . 146Lane Keep Assist (LKA)Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 146Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . . . 147Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . 148Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 149Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 149Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 149Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . 150Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 150Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . 150Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . . 154

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Engine Power Messages . . . . . 158Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . . 158

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 158

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . . 166Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168


Instruments and Controls 123

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustmentPower Tilt and TelescopingSteering Wheel

To adjust the power tilt andtelescoping steering wheel:

Press the control to move thesteering wheel up and down orforward and rearward.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steeringwheel controls. See "SteeringWheel Controls" in the infotainmentmanual.

Heated Steering Wheel

( : Press to turn the heatedsteering wheel on or off. A light nextto the button displays when thefeature is turned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.

Horn

To sound the horn, pressa on thesteering wheel.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper control is onthe turn signal lever.

The windshield wipers are controlledby turning the band withzFRONT on it.

1 : Fast wipes.

w : Slow wipes.

3 INT : If Rainsense is turned off,turn thez FRONT band up formore frequent wipes or down forless frequent wipes. If Rainsense isturned on, see Rainsense later inthis section.



OFF : Turns the windshieldwipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, turn to8,then release. For several wipes,hold the band on8 longer.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement 0 303.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. An internal circuitbreaker to the motor will stop themotor until it cools down.

Wiper Parking

If the ignition is turned off while thewipers are onw,1, or3 INT,they will immediately stop.

Ifz FRONT is then moved toOFF before the driver door isopened or within 10 minutes, thewipers will restart and move to thebase of the windshield.

If the ignition is turned off while thewipers are performing wipes due towindshield washing or Rainsense,the wipers continue to run until theyreach the base of the windshield.

Rainsense

With Rainsense, a sensor near thetop center of the windshield detectsthe amount of water on thewindshield and controls thefrequency of the windshield wiper.

Keep this area of the windshieldclear of debris to allow for bestsystem performance.

3 INT : Turn thez FRONTband on the wiper lever to adjust thesensitivity when Rainsense isturned on.

. Turn the band up for moresensitivity to moisture.

. Turn the band down to lower INTsetting for less sensitivity tomoisture.

Move the band out of the3 INTposition to deactivate Rainsense.

z AUTO : Press to turnRainsense on or off. When turnedon andz FRONT is in one of theRainsense wipe sensitivity positionsthe wipers can be adjusted for moreor less sensitivity to moisture. Whenturned off, the wipers operate astimed intermittent wipers and can beadjusted for more or less frequentwipes.

Ifz AUTO is turned on when theignition is turned on, or if the ignitionis in on and thez FRONT bandis in one of the sensitivity settings



whenz AUTO is turned on or off,a message may display indicating ifRainsense was turned on or off.

If the ignition is in on andzFRONT is not in one of thesensitivity settings whenz AUTOis turned on, a message maydisplay indicating that the wiperband must be in one of thesensitivity settings for Rainsense tooperate.

Wiper Arm Assembly Protection

When using an automatic car wash,move the windshield wiper lever toOFF. This disables the automaticRainsense windshield wipers.

With Rainsense, if the transmissionis in N (Neutral) and the vehiclespeed is very slow, the wipers willautomatically stop at the base of thewindshield.

The wiper operations return tonormal when the transmission is nolonger in N (Neutral) or the vehiclespeed has increased.

Windshield Washer

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

L m : Push the paddle marked withthe windshield washer symbol at thetop of the turn signal lever to spraywasher fluid and activate the wipers.The wipers will continue until thepaddle is released or the maximumwash time is reached. When thepaddle is released, additional wipesmay occur depending on how longthe windshield washer had beenactivated. See Washer Fluid 0 296for information on filling thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper control is on the turnsignal lever.

To turn the rear wiper on, slide thelever to a wiper position.

OFF : Turns the wiper off.

INT : Turns on the rear wiper with adelay between wipes.

ON : Turns on the rear wiper.

= REAR : Press this button on theend of the lever to spray washerfluid on the rear window. The wiperswill clear the rear window and eitherstop or return to your preset speed.For more washer cycles, press andhold the button.

The rear window wiper/washer willnot operate if the liftgate or liftglassis open or ajar. If the liftgate or



liftglass is opened while the rearwiper is on, the wiper returns to theparked position and stops.

Rear Wiper Arm AssemblyProtection

When using an automatic car wash,move the rear wiper control to OFFto disable the rear wiper. In somevehicles, if the transmission is inN (Neutral) and the vehicle speed isvery slow, the rear wiper willautomatically park under the rearspoiler.

The wiper operations return tonormal when the transmission is nolonger in N (Neutral) or the vehiclespeed has increased.

Reverse Gear Wipes

If the rear wiper control is off, therear wiper will automatically operatecontinuously when the shift lever isin R (Reverse), and the frontwindshield wiper is performing lowor high speed wipes. If the rearwiper control is off, the shift lever isin R (Reverse), and the frontwindshield wiper is performing

interval wipes, then the rear wiperautomatically performs intervalwipes.

This feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization 0 158.

The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and the rearwindow. Check the fluid level in thereservoir if either washer is notworking. See Washer Fluid 0 296.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,and vehicle speed information.

The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass system

will automatically determine when aGPS signal is restored and providea heading again.

Clock

Setting the Time and Date withCenter Stack Controls

To set the time or date:

1. Select SETTINGS from theHome Page, then select Timeand Date.

2. Select the desired function.

3. Turn the MENU knob toincrease or decrease the value.

4. Press the MENU knob to go tothe next value. After the lastvalue is selected, the systemwill update and return to theSettings menu. Press o BACKto go to the last menu andsave the changes.

Auto Set requires an activeconnection to OnStar.



If auto timing is set, the timedisplayed on the clock may notupdate immediately when drivinginto a new time zone.

To set the clock display:

1. Select SETTINGS from theHome Page, then select Timeand Date.

2. Select Clock Display.

3. Turn the MENU knob to Offor On.

4. Press the MENU knob toselect.

Press o BACK to go to the lastmenu and save the changes.

Setting the Time and Date withInfotainment Display Controls

To set the time:

1. Touch SETTINGS on the HomePage, then touch Timeand Date.

2. Touch Set Time, then touch«orª to increase or decreasehours, minutes, and AM or PM.Touch 12–24 Hr for 12 or24 hour clock.

3. Touch S to go back to theprevious menu.

Auto Set requires an activeconnection to OnStar.

If auto timing is set, the timedisplayed on the clock may notupdate immediately when drivinginto a new time zone.

To set the date:


2. Touch Set Date, then touch«orª to increase or decreasemonth, day, or year.


To set the clock display:


2. Touch Clock Display, thentouch Off or On to turn theclock display off or on.


Power OutletsPower Outlets 12-Volt DirectCurrent

Accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone, MP3player, etc.

The vehicle may have up to fiveaccessory power outlets:

Vehicles with a Center Console

. One in front of the cupholders onthe center console

. One inside the center storageconsole

. One on the rear of the centerstorage console



. One in the third row seat on thedriver side


Vehicles with Bench Seats

. One on the center stack belowthe climate control system

. One in the storage area on thebench seat

. One on the rear of the centerarmrest storage

. One in the third row seat area onthe driver side


Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.

The accessory power outlets arepowered as follows:

. The power outlet near thecupholders for vehicles with acenter console or on the centerstack for vehicles with benchseats, can be configured tooperate using RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) or

battery power modes. If thesepower outlets are used while inthe battery power mode, thiscould cause interferencebetween the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter and thevehicle, and the vehicle may notstart.See Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) 0 207 or IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access)0 205.

. The power outlets in the thirdrow seat area or in the rearcargo area are powered at alltimes. The power outlets insidethe storage area, on the rear ofthe console, or on the benchseat are only powered when theignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RAP isactive.

{ Warning

Power is always supplied to theoutlet, if configured accordingly.Do not leave electrical equipment

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

plugged in when the vehicle is notin use because the vehicle couldcatch fire and cause injury ordeath.

Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the ignition is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum15 amp rating.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.



When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 274.

Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Power Outlet 110/120-VoltAlternating Current

If equipped with this power outlet, itcan be used to plug in electricalequipment that uses a maximumlimit of 150 watts.

For vehicles with a center console,the 110/120-volt power outlet is onthe rear of the center console.

For vehicles with bench seats, the110/120-volt power outlet is on thecenter stack below the climatecontrols.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is on,equipment requiring less than 150watts is plugged into the outlet, andno system fault is detected.

The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition is off or if theequipment is not fully seated intothe outlet.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off. To reset thecircuit, unplug the item and plug itback in or turn the ignition off andthen back to on. The power restartswhen equipment using 150 watts orless is plugged into the outlet and asystem fault is not detected.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following, and may not workproperly if they are plugged in:

. Equipment with high initial peakwattage, such ascompressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools

. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supply,such asmicrocomputer-controlledelectric blankets and touchsensor lamps

. Medical equipment

Wireless ChargingThe vehicle may have wirelesscharging on top of the centerconsole. See Center ConsoleStorage 0 120. The systemoperates at 145 kHz and wirelesslycharges one PMA or Qi compatiblemobile device. The power output ofthe system is capable of charging ata rate up to 1 amp (5W), asrequested by the compatible mobiledevice. See Radio FrequencyStatement 0 396.



To check for phone or other devicecompatibility:

. In the U.S., see my.gmc.com/learn.

. In Canada, seegmtotalconnect.ca.

. Or, see your dealer for details.

{ Warning

Wireless charging can affect theoperation of an implantedpacemaker or other medicaldevices. If you have one, it isrecommended to consult withyour doctor before using thewireless charging system.

The vehicle must be on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) must beactive. The wireless chargingfeature may not correctly indicatecharging when the vehicle is in RAP.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 212.

The operating temperature is −20 °C(−4 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F) for thecharging system and 0 °C (32 °F) to35 °C (95 °F) for the phone.

{ Warning

Remove all objects from thecharging pad before chargingyour mobile device. Objects, suchas coins, keys, rings, paper clips,or cards, between the phone andcharging pad will become veryhot. On the rare occasion that thecharging system does not detectan object, and the object getswedged between the phone andcharger, remove the phone andallow the object to cool beforeremoving it from the chargingpad, to prevent burns.

To charge a mobile device:

1. Remove all objects from thecharging pad. The system maynot charge if there are anyobjects between the mobiledevice and charging pad.

2. Place the mobile device faceup against the alignment rib onthe charge pad.

3. The} will appear on the Von the infotainment display.This indicates that the mobiledevice is properly positionedand charging. If a mobiledevice is placed on thecharging pad and} does not



display, remove the mobiledevice from the pad, turn it180 degrees, and waitthree seconds before placing/aligning the mobile device onthe pad again.

Software Acknowledgements

Certain Wireless Charging Moduleproduct from LG Electronics, Inc.("LGE") contains the open sourcesoftware detailed below. Refer tothe indicated open source licenses(as are included following thisnotice) for the terms and conditionsof their use.

OSS Notice Information

To obtain the source code that iscontained in this product, pleasevisit http://opensource.lge.com. Inaddition to the source code, allreferred license terms, warrantydisclaimers and copyright noticesare available for download. LGElectronics will also provide opensource code to you on CD-ROM fora charge covering the cost ofperforming such distribution (suchas the cost of media, shipping, andhandling) upon email request to

[email protected]. This offer isvalid for three (3) years from thedate on which you purchased theproduct.

Freescale-WCT library

Copyright (c) 2012-2014 FreescaleSemiconductor, Inc.. All rightsreserved.

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, this list of conditionsand the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary formmust reproduce the abovecopyright notice, this list ofconditions and the followingdisclaimer in thedocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution.

3. Neither the name of thecopyright holder nor the namesof its contributors may be usedto endorse or promote productsderived from this softwarewithout specific prior writtenpermission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDEDBY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERSAND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUTNOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENTSHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDEROR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLEFOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITEDTO, PROCUREMENT OFSUBSTITUTE GOODS ORSERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVERCAUSED AND ON ANY THEORYOF LIABILITY, WHETHER INCONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,OR TORT (INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OFTHE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,EVEN IF ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.



Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Some warning lights come on brieflywhen the engine is started toindicate they are working. Whenone of the warning lights comes onand stays on while driving, or whenone of the gauges shows there maybe a problem, check the section thatexplains what to do. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and evendangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English, Metric Similar



Denali English Standard Theme, Metric Similar



Cluster Menu

There is an interactive display areain the center of the instrumentcluster.

Use the right steering wheel controlto open and scroll through thedifferent items and displays.

Press o to access the cluster

applications. Usew orx to scrollthrough the list of availableapplications. Not all applications willbe available on all vehicles.

. Info App. This is where theselected Driver InformationCenter (DIC) displays can beviewed. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 151.

. Audio

. Phone

. Navigation

. Options

Audio

Press V to select the Audio app,

then press p to enter the Audiomenu. In the Audio menu browse formusic, select from the favorites,or change the audio source. Useworx to change the station or go tothe next or previous track.

Phone

Press V to select the Phone app,

then press p to enter the Phonemenu. In the Phone menu, if there isno active phone call, view recentcalls, or scroll through contacts.

If there is an active call, mute thephone or switch to handsetoperation.

Navigation

Press V to select the Navigation

app, then press p to enter theNavigation menu. If there is noactive route, you can resume thelast route and turn the voiceprompts on/off. If there is an activeroute, press V to cancel or resumeroute guidance or turn the voiceprompts on or off.

Options

Press V to select the Options app,

then press p to enter the Options

menu. Usew orx to scrollthrough items in the Options menu.

Units : Press p while Units isdisplayed to enter the Units menu.Choose English or Metric units bypressing V while the desired item ishighlighted. A checkmark will bedisplayed next to the selected item.



Display Themes (Denali) : Thereare three instrument cluster displayconfigurations to choose from:Standard, Technology, and Media.

Info Pages : Press p while InfoPages is displayed to enter the InfoPages menu and select the items tobe displayed in the Info app. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 151.

Head-up Display (HUD) Rotation :If equipped, this feature allows foradjusting the angle of the HUDimage. Press p on the steeringwheel controls while Head-upDisplay Rotation is highlighted toenter Adjust Mode. Pressw orxto adjust the angle of the HUDdisplay. Press V to confirm andsave the setting. To cancel thesetting, press o. The vehicle mustbe in P (Park).

Speed Warning : The SpeedWarning display allows the driver toset a speed that they do not want toexceed. To set the Speed Warning,press p when Speed Warning is

displayed. Enable the speedwarning and then usew orx to

adjust the value. Press V to set thespeed. Once the speed is set, thisfeature can be turned off bypressing V while viewing this page.If the selected speed limit isexceeded, a pop-up warning isdisplayed with a chime.

Software Information : Displaysopen source software information.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles. The odometerdisplays on the Speed page of theDriver Information Center (DIC).

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 151.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).



Fuel Gauge

English Standard Theme Shown,Metric Similar

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how muchfuel is left in the tank.

There is an arrow near the fuelgauge pointing to the side of thevehicle the fuel door is on.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There still isa little fuel left, but the vehicleshould be refueled soon.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:

. At the service station, the fuelpump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine Oil PressureGauge

Metric Standard Theme



English Standard Theme

The engine oil pressure gaugeshows the engine oil pressurein kPa (kilopascals) or psi (poundsper square inch) when the engine isrunning.

Oil pressure can vary with enginespeed, outside temperature, and oilviscosity.

A reading outside the normaloperating range can be caused by adangerously low oil level or someother problem causing low oilpressure. Check the vehicle's oil assoon as possible. An oil pressuremessage may display. See EngineOil 0 283.

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Checkthe oil level as soon as possible.Add oil if required, but if the oillevel is within the operating rangeand the oil pressure is still low,have the vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge





This gauge measures thetemperature of the vehicle's enginecoolant.

While driving under normaloperating conditions, if the needlemoves into the red warning area,the engine is too hot. Pull off theroad, stop the vehicle, and turn offthe engine as soon as possible.

TransmissionTemperature Gauge



This gauge appears when thevehicle is in Tow/Haul Mode andshows the transmission fluidtemperature. If the gauge is readingin the red area and/or a messageappears in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the vehicle must bestopped and the cause checked.One possible cause is a low fluidlevel in the transmission.



Caution

Do not drive the vehicle while thetransmission fluid is overheating,or the transmission can bedamaged. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not becovered by the warranty.

Voltmeter Gauge

Standard Theme

When the ignition is on, this gaugeindicates the battery voltage.

When the engine is running, thisgauge shows the condition of thecharging system. The gauge cantransition from a higher to lower or alower to higher reading. This isnormal. If the vehicle is operatingoutside the normal operating range,the charging system light comes on.See Charging System Light 0 142for more information. The voltmetergauge may also read lower when infuel economy mode. This is normal.

Readings outside the normaloperating range can also occurwhen a large number of electricalaccessories are operating in thevehicle and the engine is left idlingfor an extended period. Thiscondition is normal since thecharging system is not able toprovide full power at engine idle. Asengine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself ashigher engine speeds allow thecharging system to create maximumpower.

The vehicle can only be driven for ashort time with the readings outsidethe normal operating range. If thevehicle must be driven, turn off all

accessories, such as the radio andair conditioner and unplug allchargers and accessories.

Readings outside the normaloperating range indicate a possibleproblem in the electrical system.Have the vehicle serviced as soonas possible.

Seat Belt Reminders

Driver Seat Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver seat belt reminderlight on the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir seat belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue several



times if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver seat belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Seat Belt ReminderLight

There may be a passenger seat beltreminder light near the passengerairbag status indicator. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 91.

For vehicles equipped with thepassenger seat belt reminder light,when the vehicle is started this lightflashes and a chime may come onto remind passengers to fasten theirseat belt. Then the light stays onsolid until the belt is buckled. Thiscycle continues several times if the

passenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger seat belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger seat beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe seat belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system (if equipped), thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring, and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System 0 85.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.



Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System 0 91 for importantsafety information. The passengerairbag status indicator is in theoverhead console.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or thesymbols for on and off, for severalseconds as a system check. Then,

after several more seconds, thestatus indicator will light either ONor OFF, or the on or off symbol, tolet you know the status of the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag isallowed to inflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

with the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 141 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical charging



system. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

When this light comes on, or isflashing, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) also displays amessage.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check EngineLight)This light is part of the vehicle’semission control on-boarddiagnostic system. If this light is onwhile the engine is running, amalfunction has been detected andthe vehicle may require service. Thelight should come on to show that itis working when the ignition is inService Mode.See Ignition Positions (Key Access)0 207 or Ignition Positions (KeylessAccess) 0 205.

Malfunctions are often indicated bythe system before any problem isnoticeable. Being aware of the lightand seeking service promptly whenit comes on may prevent damage.

Caution

If the vehicle is driven continuallywith this light on, the emissioncontrol system may not work aswell, the fuel economy may belower, and the vehicle may notrun smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Modifications to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system, or the use ofreplacement tires that do notmeet the original tirespecifications, can cause this lightto come on. This could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoaffect the vehicle’s ability to passan Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 278.

If the light is flashing : Amalfunction has been detected thatcould damage the emission controlsystem and increase vehicleemissions. Diagnosis and servicemay be required.

To help prevent damage, reducevehicle speed and avoid hardaccelerations and uphill grades.



If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauled assoon as possible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to park. Turn the vehicleoff and wait at least 10 secondsbefore restarting the engine. If thelight is still flashing, follow theprevious guidelines and see yourdealer for service as soon aspossible.

If the light is on steady : Amalfunction has been detected.Diagnosis and service may berequired.

Check the following:

. If fuel has been added to thevehicle using the capless fuelfunnel adapter, make sure that ithas been removed. See “Fillingthe Tank with a Portable GasCan” under Filling the Tank0 256. The diagnostic systemcan detect if the adapter hasbeen left installed in the vehicle,allowing fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. A few drivingtrips with the adapter removedmay turn off the light.

. Poor fuel quality can causeinefficient engine operation andpoor driveability, which may goaway once the engine is warmedup. If this occurs, change thefuel brand. It may require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off. See Fuel0 254.

If the light remains on, see yourdealer.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

If the vehicle requires an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test, thetest equipment will likely connect tothe vehicle's Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. Connecting devices that are

not used to perform an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test or toservice the vehicle may affectvehicle operation. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 274. Seeyour dealer if assistance is needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:

. The light is on when the engineis running.

. The light does not come onwhen the ignition is inService Mode.

. Critical emission control systemshave not been completelydiagnosed. If this happens, thevehicle would not be ready forinspection and might requireseveral days of routine drivingbefore the system is ready forinspection. This can happen ifthe 12-volt battery has recentlybeen replaced or run down, or ifthe vehicle has been recentlyserviced.

See your dealer if the vehicle willnot pass or cannot be made readyfor the test.



Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the engine is started. If it doesnot come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn you if there isa problem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is set. Thelight stays on if the parking brake

does not fully release. If it stays onafter the parking brake is fullyreleased, it means the vehicle has abrake problem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal might be harder to push,or the pedal can go closer to thefloor. It may take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle 0 355.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the light comes on while driving,stop as soon as it is safely possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then startthe engine again to reset thesystem. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. A chime mayalso sound when the light comes onsteady.

If the ABS light is the only light on,the vehicle has regular brakes, butthe antilock brakes are notfunctioning.



If both the ABS and the brakesystem warning light are on, thevehicle's antilock brakes are notfunctioning and there is a problemwith the regular brakes. See yourdealer for service.

See Brake System Warning Light0 145.

Four-Wheel-Drive Light

The four-wheel-drive light comes onwhen the transfer case is shiftedinto four-wheel drive and the frontaxle engages. LO or HI will also benext to this light when the vehicle isin four-wheel low or four-wheel high.

Some delay between the shiftingand the light coming on is normal.

See Four-Wheel Drive 0 222.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/HaulMode feature, this light comes onwhen the Tow/Haul Mode has beenactivated.

See Tow/Haul Mode 0 222.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)Light

This light is green if LKA is availableto assist.

LKA may assist by gently turningthe steering wheel if the vehicleapproaches a detected lane marking

without using the turn signal in thatdirection. The LKA light will turnamber.

This light is amber and flashes as aLane Departure Warning (LDW)alert, to indicate that the lanemarking has been crossed.

See Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 252.

Vehicle Ahead Indicator

If equipped, this indicator willdisplay green when a vehicle isdetected ahead and amber whenyou are following a vehicle aheadmuch too closely.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 246.



Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.


StabiliTrak OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If StabiliTrak and TCS are off, thesystem does not assist in controllingthe vehicle. Turn on the TCS andthe StabiliTrak systems, and thewarning light turns off.


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled.A Driver Information Center (DIC)message may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the light is on and flashing, theTCS and/or the StabiliTrak systemis actively working.




Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light goes off.

Caution

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light indicates that thevehicle has overheated. Drivingwith this light on can damage the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

engine and it may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. SeeEngine Overheating 0 294.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens, pull over and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating 0 294.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. Stop as soon as possible,and inflate the tires to the pressurevalue shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See TirePressure 0 327.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 330.



Engine Oil Pressure Light

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Checkthe oil level as soon as possible.Add oil if required, but if the oillevel is within the operating rangeand the oil pressure is still low,have the vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light is near the fuel gauge andcomes on briefly when the ignition isturned on as a check to show it isworking.

It also comes on when the fuel tankis low on fuel. The light turns offwhen fuel is added. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operation0 51.

High-Beam On Light



This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger 0 172.

IntelliBeam® Light

This light comes on when theIntelliBeam system, if equipped, isenabled.

See Exterior Lamp Controls 0 170.

Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with fog lamps, thislight comes on when the fog lampsare on.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps 0 175 for more information.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when theexterior lamps are in use. SeeExterior Lamp Controls 0 170.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is whitewhen the cruise control is on andready, and turns green when thecruise control is set and active.

See Cruise Control 0 233.

Adaptive Cruise Control Light

This light is white when the AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC, if equipped) ison and ready, and turns green whenthe ACC is set and active. SeeAdaptive Cruise Control 0 235.

Door Ajar Light

This light comes on when a door isopen or not securely latched. Beforedriving, check that all doors areproperly closed.



Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC displays are shown in thecenter of the instrument cluster inthe Info app. See Instrument Cluster0 133. The displays show the statusof many vehicle systems. Thecontrols for the DIC are on the rightsteering wheel control.

w orx : Press to move up ordown in a list.

o or p : Press to move betweenthe interactive display zones in thecluster.

V : Press to open a menu or selecta menu item. Press and hold toreset values on certain screens.

DIC Info Page Options

The info pages on the DIC can beturned on or off through theOptions menu.

1. Press o to access the clusterapplications.

2. Pressw orx to scroll to theOptions application.

3. Press V to enter theOptions menu.

4. Scroll to Info Pages andpress p.

5. Pressw orx to movethrough the list of possibleinformation displays.

6. Press V while an item ishighlighted to select ordeselect that item. When anitem is selected, a checkmarkwill appear next to it.

DIC Info Pages

The following is the list of allpossible DIC info page displays.Some may not be available for yourparticular vehicle. Some items maynot be turned on by default but canbe turned on through the Optionsapp. See “DIC Info Page Options”earlier in this section.

Speed : Shows the vehicle speed ineither kilometers per hour (km/h) ormiles per hour (mph). The vehicleodometer is also shown onthis page.

Trip A or Trip B, Average FuelEconomy, and Average Speed :Shows the current distance traveled,in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi), since the trip odometerwas last reset.

The Average Fuel Economy displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)



or miles per gallon (mpg). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of L/100 km (mpg) recordedsince the last time this menu itemwas reset. This number reflects onlythe approximate average fueleconomy that the vehicle has rightnow, and will change as drivingconditions change.

The Average Speed display showsthe average speed of the vehicle inkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value.

Press and hold V while this displayis active to reset the trip odometer,the average fuel economy, and theaverage speed. Or press p andselect reset in the menu.

Fuel Range and InstantaneousFuel Economy : Shows theapproximate distance the vehiclecan be driven without refueling.LOW will be displayed when thevehicle is low on fuel. The fuelrange estimate is based on anaverage of the vehicle's fuel

economy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. It also shows if theActive Fuel Management is activeand in V4 mode, or inactive and inV8 mode. See Active FuelManagement 0 214.

The Instantaneous Fuel Economydisplay shows the current fueleconomy in either liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This numberreflects only the approximate fueleconomy that the vehicle has rightnow and changes frequently asdriving conditions change.

Timer and Fuel Used : Can beused as a timer. To start the timer,press V while this display is active.The display will show the amount oftime that has passed since the timerwas last reset. To stop the timer,press V briefly while this display isactive and the timer is running. Toreset the timer to zero, press andhold V while this display is active.

This also shows the number ofliters (L) or gallons (gal) of fuel usedsince the last reset of thismenu item.

Oil Life : Shows an estimate of theoil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.The oil should be changed as soonas possible. See Engine Oil 0 283.In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 370.

The Oil Life display must be resetafter each oil change. It will notreset itself. Do not to reset the OilLife display at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, press and



hold V for several seconds whilethe Oil Life display is active. SeeEngine Oil Life System 0 285.

Tire Pressure : Shows theapproximate pressures of all fourtires. Tire pressure is displayed ineither kilopascal (kPa) or in poundsper square inch (psi). If the pressureis low, the value for that tire isshown in amber.See Tire Pressure Monitor System0 329 and Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 330.

Best Fuel Economy : Displaysaverage fuel economy, the best fueleconomy over the selecteddistance, and a bar graph showinginstantaneous fuel economy.

Press p to change the selected

distance. Press and hold V whilethis display is active to reset thebest fuel economy and average fueleconomy. This display can also bereset by selecting reset in the menu.

Top Consumers : Shows a list ofthe features that are currentlyimpacting the fuel economy, in order

from highest to lowest. If a feature isturned off, it will be removed fromthe list.

Economy Trend : Shows history ofthe Average Fuel Economy from thelast 50 km (30 mi). Each barrepresents about 5 km (3 mi) ofdriving. During driving the bars willshift to always reflect the mostrecent distance on the right side.Press and hold V to clear the graph

or press p to reset throughthe menu.

ECO Index : Provides feedback onthe efficiency of current drivingbehavior. The bar graph shows avalue that is based on current fuelconsumption compared to what isexpected from the vehicle with goodand bad driving habits. It also showsif the Active Fuel Management isactive and in V4 mode, or inactiveand in V8 mode. See Active FuelManagement 0 214.

Engine Hours : Shows the totalnumber of hours the engine has run.This display also shows the engineidle hours.

Trailer Brake : Displays on vehicleswith the Integrated Trailer BrakeControl (ITBC) system.

TRAILER GAIN shows the trailergain setting.

OUTPUT shows the power output tothe trailer any time a trailer withelectric brakes is connected. Outputis displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashesmay appear in the OUTPUT displayif a trailer is not connected.

Speed Signs : Shows signinformation, which comes from aroadway database in the onboardnavigation.

Off Road : Displays vehicle pitchand roll information, road wheelangle, and four-wheel drive (4WD)status.

Following Distance : Used toselect the alert timing for theForward Collision Alert (FCA). SeeForward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 246.

Blank Page : Shows noinformation.



Transmission Fluid TemperatureGauge : Shows the temperature ofthe automatic transmission fluid ineither degrees Celsius (°C) ordegrees Fahrenheit (°F).

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{ Warning

If the HUD image is too bright ortoo high in your field of view, itmay take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.

If equipped with HUD, someinformation concerning theoperation of the vehicle is projectedonto the windshield. The image isprojected through the HUD lens ontop of the instrument panel. Theinformation appears as an imagefocused out toward the front of thevehicle.

Caution

If you try to use the HUD imageas a parking aid, you maymisjudge the distance anddamage your vehicle. Do not usethe HUD image as a parking aid.

The HUD information can bedisplayed in various languages. Thespeedometer reading and othernumerical values can be displayedin either English or metric units.

The language selection is changedthrough the radio and the units ofmeasurement is changed throughthe instrument cluster. See VehiclePersonalization 0 158 and “ClusterSettings Menu” under InstrumentCluster 0 133.

HUD Display on the VehicleWindshield

The HUD may display some of thefollowing vehicle information andvehicle messages or alerts:

. Speed

. Tachometer

. Audio

. Phone

. Navigation

. Collision Alert

. Cruise Control

. Lane Departure

. Low Fuel



Some vehicle messages or alertsdisplayed in the HUD may becleared by using the steering wheelcontrols. See Vehicle Messages0 157.

Some information shown may notbe available on your vehicle if it isnot equipped with these features.

The HUD control is to the left of thesteering wheel.

To adjust the HUD image:

1. Adjust the driver seat.

2. Start the engine.

3. Use the following settings toadjust the HUD.

$ : Press down or lift up to centerthe HUD image. The HUD imagecan only be adjusted up and down,not side to side.

! : Press to select the displayview. Each press will change thedisplay view.

D : Lift up and hold to brighten thedisplay. Press down and hold to dimthe display. Hold down to turn thedisplay off.

The HUD image will automaticallydim and brighten to compensate foroutside lighting. The HUDbrightness control can also beadjusted as needed.

The HUD image can temporarilylight up depending on the angle andposition of the sunlight on the HUDdisplay. This is normal.

Polarized sunglasses could makethe HUD image harder to see.

Head-Up Display (HUD) RotationOption

This feature allows for adjusting theangle of the HUD image.

Press@ on the steering wheelcontrols while Head-up DisplayRotation is highlighted to enterAdjust Mode. Pressy orz toadjust the angle of the HUD display.Press S or T to highlight OK, then

press@ to save the setting.CANCEL can also be selected tocancel the setting. The vehicle mustbe in P (Park). See InstrumentCluster 0 133.

Press@ on the steering wheelcontrols while Head-up DisplayRotation is highlighted to enterAdjust Mode. Pressy orz toadjust the angle of the HUD display.Press S or T to highlight OK, then

press@ to save the setting.CANCEL can also be selected tocancel the setting. The vehicle mustbe in P (Park). See InstrumentCluster 0 133.

HUD Views

There are four views in the HUD.Some vehicle information andvehicle messages or alerts may bedisplayed in any view.



Metric

English

Speed View : This display gives thespeedometer reading (in English ormetric units), speed limit, AdaptiveCruise Control speed, LaneDeparture Warning, and vehicleahead indicator. Some informationonly appears on vehicles that havethese features, and when they areactive.

Metric

English

Audio/Phone View : This displaysthe speed view along with audio/phone information. The current radiostation, media type, and incomingcalls will be displayed.

All HUD views may briefly displayaudio information when the driveruses the steering wheel controls toadjust the audio settings appearingin the instrument cluster.

Incoming phone calls appearing inthe instrument cluster may alsodisplay in any HUD view.

Metric

English

Navigation View : This displays thespeed view along with Turn-by-TurnNavigation information. Thecompass heading is displayed whennavigation routing is not active.

Navigation Turn-by-Turn Alertsshown in the instrument cluster mayalso be displayed in any HUD view.



Metric

English

Performance View : This displaysthe speedometer reading, rpmreading, transmission positions, andgear shift indicator.

Care of the HUD

Clean the inside of the windshield toremove any dirt or film that couldreduce the sharpness or clarity ofthe HUD image.

Clean the HUD lens with a soft clothsprayed with glass cleaner. Wipethe lens gently, then dry it.

HUD Troubleshooting

Check that:

. Nothing is covering theHUD lens.

. HUD brightness setting is nottoo dim or too bright.

. HUD is adjusted to the properheight.

. Polarized sunglasses arenot worn.

. Windshield and HUD lens areclean.

If the HUD image is not correct,contact your dealer.

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. See WindshieldReplacement 0 304.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing V. The messages thatrequire immediate action cannot becleared until that action isperformed.

All messages should be takenseriously; clearing the messagedoes not correct the problem.

If a SERVICE message appears,see your dealer.

Follow the instructions given in themessages. The system displaysmessages regarding the followingtopics:

. Service Messages

. Fluid Levels

. Vehicle Security



. Brakes

. Ride Control Systems

. Driver Assistance Systems

. Cruise Control

. Lighting and Bulb Replacement

. Wiper/Washer Systems

. Doors and Windows

. Seat Belts

. Airbag Systems

. Engine and Transmission

. Tire Pressure

. Battery

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's propulsion power isreduced. Reduced propulsion powercan affect the vehicle's ability toaccelerate. If this message is on,but there is no observed reductionin performance, proceed to yourdestination. The performance maybe reduced the next time the vehicleis driven. The vehicle may be driven

while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, or displaysrepeatedly, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Vehicle Speed Messages

SPEED LIMITED TOXXX KM/H (MPH)

This message shows that thevehicle speed has been limited tothe speed displayed. The limitedspeed is a protection for variouspropulsion and vehicle systems,such as lubrication, thermal,suspension, Teen Driver ifequipped, or tires.

VehiclePersonalizationUse the audio system controls toaccess the personalization menusfor customizing vehicle features.

The following are all possiblepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

Radio Audio System Controls

1. Touch the desired feature todisplay a list of availableoptions.

2. Select the desired featuresetting.

3. Press o BACK on the center

stack or touch 0 to return tothe previous menu or exit.

Turn the vehicle on to access theSettings menu, then selectSETTINGS from the Home Page onthe infotainment display.



Personalization Menus

The following list of menu items maybe available:

. Time and Date

. Language

. Rear Seat Reminder

. Video Voice-Over

. Teen Driver

. Valet Mode

. Radio

. Vehicle

. Bluetooth

. Apple CarPlay

. Android Auto

. Voice

. Display

. Rear Camera

. Return to Factory Settings

. Software Information

. Wi-Fi

Detailed information for each menufollows.

Time and Date

Manually set the time and date. SeeClock 0 126.

Language

Select Language, then select fromthe available language(s).

The selected language will displayon the system, and voicerecognition (if equipped) will reflectthe selected language.

Rear Seat Reminder

This allows for a chime and amessage when the rear door hasbeen opened before or duringoperation of the vehicle.

Select Off or On.

Video Voice-Over

When activated, the RSI will readaloud menu titles, menu listings,pop-ups, alerts, and file titles fromaudio and video media.

Select Off or On.

Teen Driver

See “Teen Driver” under “Settings”in the infotainment manual.

Valet Mode

This will lock the infotainmentsystem and steering wheel controls.It may also limit access to vehiclestorage locations, if equipped.

To enable valet mode:

1. Enter a four-digit code on thekeypad.

2. Select Enter to go to theconfirmation screen.

3. Re-enter the four-digit code.

Touch LOCK or UNLOCK to lock orunlock the system. Touch Back togo back to the previous menu.

Radio

Select and the following maydisplay:

. Manage Favorites

. Number of Favorites Shown

. Audible Touch Feedback

. Bose AudioPilot



. Auto Volume

. Maximum Startup Volume

. Audio Cue Volume

Manage Favorites

This allows favorites to be edited.See “Manage Favorites” in“Settings” under “Radio” in theinfotainment manual.

Number of Favorites Shown

Select to set the number of favoritesto display.

Select the desired number or selectAuto and the infotainment systemwill automatically adjust the numberof favorites shown.

Audible Touch Feedback

This allows Audible TouchFeedback to be turned on or off.

Select Off or On.

Bose AudioPilot

This allows Bose AudioPilot to beturned on or off.

Select Off or On.

Auto Volume

This feature adjusts the volumebased on vehicle speed andambient noise.

Select Off, Low, Medium-Low,Medium, Medium-High, or High.

Maximum Startup Volume

This feature sets the maximumstartup volume. If the vehicle isstarted and the volume is greaterthan this level, the volume isadjusted to this level. To set themaximum startup volume, touch +or − to increase or decrease.

Audio Cue Volume

This feature sets the volume ofaudio files played at system startupand shutdown.

Select On, then touch + or − toincrease or decrease the volume.

Vehicle


. Climate and Air Quality

. Collision/Detection Systems

. Comfort and Convenience

. Lighting

. Power Door Locks

. Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Climate and Air Quality


. Auto Fan Speed

. Auto Defog

. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Speed

This feature will set the auto fanspeed.

Select Low, Medium, or High.

Auto Defog

When set to On, the auto defogcomes on when the climate controlsensor detects high interiorhumidity. Air will be directed to thewindshield.

Select Off or On.



Auto Rear Defog

If equipped, this feature willautomatically turn on the rearwindow defogger when the vehicleis first started in cold weather andturn off when the vehicle is warmed.

Select Off or On.

Collision/Detection Systems


. Alert Type

. Forward Collision System

. Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier

. Park Assist

. Side Blind Zone Alert

. Rear Cross Traffic Alert

Alert Type

This feature will set crash alerts tobeeps or seat vibrations. Thissetting affects all crash alertsincluding Forward Collision Alert,Lane Departure Warning, and ParkAssist alerts.

Select Beeps or Safety Alert Seat.

Forward Collision System

This feature will turn on or offForward Collision Alert (FCA) andForward Automatic Braking (FAB).The Off setting disables all FCA andFAB functions. With the Alert andBrake setting, both FCA and FABare available. The Alert settingdisables FAB. See ForwardAutomatic Braking (FAB) 0 248.

Select Off, Alert and Brake, or Alert.

Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier

This feature will give a reminder thatAdaptive Cruise Control provideswhen it has brought the vehicle to acomplete stop behind anotherstopping vehicle, and then thatvehicle drives on.

Select Off or On.

Park Assist

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Assistance Systemsfor Parking or Backing 0 243.

Select Off, On, or On with TowbarAttached.

Side Blind Zone Alert

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Side Blind Zone Alert(SBZA) 0 250.

Select Off or On.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Assistance Systemsfor Parking or Backing 0 243.

Select Off or On.

Comfort and Convenience


. Auto Memory Recall

. Easy Exit Options

. Chime Volume

. Hands Free Liftgate Control

. Reverse Tilt Mirror

. Auto Mirror Folding

. Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear



Auto Memory Recall

This feature automatically recallsthe current driver’s previously stored1 or 2 button positions when theignition is changed from off to on orACC/ACCESSORY. See MemorySeats 0 64.

Select On or Off.

Easy Exit Options

This feature automatically recallsthe previously stored Exit buttonposition when exiting the vehicle.See Memory Seats 0 64.

Select On or Off.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Touch + or − to adjust the volume.

Hands Free Liftgate Control

The liftgate may be operated with akicking motion under the rearbumper. See Liftgate 0 43.

Select Off, On-Open and Close,or On-Open Only.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

When on, the driver and/orpassenger mirrors will tilt downwardwhen the vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse) to improve visibility ofthe ground near the rear wheels.See Reverse Tilt Mirrors 0 55.

Select Off, On - Driver andPassenger, On - Driver, or On -Passenger.

Auto Mirror Folding

When on, the outside mirrors willautomatically fold or unfold whenthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter Q or K button ispressed and held. See FoldingMirrors 0 53.

Select Off or On.

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

When on and the front wiper is onand wiping, the rear wiper willautomatically activate when thevehicle is shifted to R (Reverse).

Select Off or On.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing may display:

. Vehicle Locator Lights

. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This feature will flash the exteriorlamps and allows some of theexterior lamps and most of theinterior lamps to turn on briefly whenK on the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter is pressed tolocate the vehicle.

Select On or Off.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Select Off, 30 Seconds, 60 Seconds,or 120 Seconds.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing may display:

. Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout



. Auto Door Unlock

. Delayed Door Lock

Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open and the key is in theignition. If Off is selected, theDelayed Door Lock menu will beavailable.

Select On or Off.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. To override thedelay, press the power door lockswitch on the door.

Select On or Off.

Remote Lock, Unlock, Start


. Remote Unlock Light Feedback

. Remote Lock Feedback

. Remote Door Unlock

. Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

. Passive Door Unlock

. Passive Door Lock

. Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Select Off or Flash Lights.

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Select Off, Lights and Horn, LightsOnly, or Horn Only.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

If turned on, this feature will turn theventilated seats on when usingremote start on warm days.

Select Off or On.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

If turned on, this feature will turn theheated seats on when using remotestart on cold days.

Select Off or On.

Passive Door Unlock

This allows the selection of whatdoors will unlock when using thebutton on the driver door to unlockthe vehicle.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Passive Door Lock

This allows passive locking to beturned on or off and selectsfeedback.




Select Off, On with HornChirp, or On.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

This feature sounds an alert whenthe RKE transmitter is left in thevehicle. This menu also enablesRemote No Longer in Vehicle Alert.

Select Off or On.

Bluetooth


. Pair New Device

. Device Management

. Ringtones

. Voice Mail Numbers

. Text Message Alerts

Pair New Device

Select to pair a new device. See“Pairing” in “Infotainment Controls”under “Bluetooth” in the infotainmentmanual.

Device Management

Select to connect to a differentphone source, disconnect a phone,or delete a phone.

Ringtones

Select to change the ring tone forthe specific phone. The phone doesnot need to be connected to changethe ring tone.

Voice Mail Numbers

This feature displays the voice mailnumber for all connected phones.To change the voice mail number,select EDIT. Type a new number,then select SAVE.

Text Message Alerts

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off.

Select Off or On.

Apple CarPlay


. Apple CarPlay

. Manage Apple CarPlay Devices

Apple CarPlay

This feature allows Apple devices tobe connected to the infotainmentsystem through a USB port.

Select Off or On.

Manage Apple CarPlay Devices

Select to manage Apple devices.Apple CarPlay must be on for thisfeature to be accessed.

Android Auto


. Android Auto

. Manage Android Auto Devices

Android Auto

This feature allows Android devicesto be connected to the infotainmentsystem through a USB port.



Select Off or On.

Manage Android Auto Devices

Select to manage Android devices.Android Auto must be on for thisfeature to be accessed.

Voice


. Prompt Length

. Audio Feedback Speed

Prompt Length

This feature adjusts the voiceprompt length.

Select Short or Long.

Audio Feedback Speed

This feature adjusts the audiofeedback speed.

Select Slow, Medium, or Fast.

Display


. Mode

. Calibrate Touchscreen

. Turn Display Off

Mode

Select to change the display of theinfotainment system.

Select Auto, Day, or Night.

Calibrate Touchscreen

Select to calibrate the touchscreen,then follow the prompts.

Turn Display Off

Select to turn the display off. Touchanywhere on the infotainmentdisplay area or press any controlson the radio center stack to turn thedisplay on.

Rear Camera


. Guidance Lines

. Rear Cross Traffic Alert

. Rear Park Assist Symbols

Guidance Lines

Select to turn Off or On. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 243.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

Select to turn Off or On.

Rear Park Assist Symbols

Select to turn Off or On. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 243.

Return to Factory Settings


. Restore Vehicle Settings

. Clear All Private Data

. Restore Radio Settings

Restore Vehicle Settings

This allows selection of restoringvehicle settings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Clear All Private Data

This allows selection to clear allprivate information from the vehicle.

Select Delete or Cancel.

Restore Radio Settings

This allows selection to restoreradio settings.



Select Restore or Cancel.

Software Information

Select to view the infotainmentsystem current software information.

Wi-Fi


. Wi-Fi

. Manage Wi-Fi Networks

Wi-Fi

This feature allows Wi-Fi networksto be turned off or on.

Select Off or On.

Manage Wi-Fi Networks

Select to manage Wi-Fi networks.Wi-Fi must be on for this feature tobe accessed.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 396.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, these buttons are in theoverhead console.

This system can replace up to threeremote control transmitters used toactivate devices such as garagedoor openers, security systems, andhome automation devices. These

instructions refer to a garage dooropener, but can be used for otherdevices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore programming the UniversalRemote system. It may help to haveanother person assist with theprogramming process.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future programming.Erase the programming whenvehicle ownership is terminated.See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons” later in thissection.

To program a garage door opener,park outside directly in line with andfacing the garage door openerreceiver. Clear all people andobjects near the garage door.



Make sure the hand-held transmitterhas a new battery for quick andaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or programming help,see www.homelink.com/gm or call1-800-355-3515.

Programming involvestime-sensitive actions, and may timeout causing the procedure to berepeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1to 3 in) away from theUniversal Remote systembuttons with the indicator lightin view. The hand-heldtransmitter was supplied by themanufacturer of the garagedoor opener receiver.

2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and one ofthe three Universal Remotesystem buttons to be used to

operate the garage door. Donot release either button untilthe indicator light goes from aslow to a rapid flashing light.Then release both buttons.

Some garage door openersmay require substitution ofStep 2 with the procedureunder “Radio Signals forCanada and Some GateOperators” later in this section.

3. Press and hold the newlyprogrammed Universal Remotesystem button for five secondswhile watching the indicatorlight and garage dooractivation.

. If the indicator light stays oncontinuously or the garagedoor moves when thebutton is pressed, thenprogramming is complete.There is no need tocomplete Steps 4–6.

. If the indicator light doesnot come on or the garagedoor does not move, asecond button press maybe required. For a second

time, press and hold thenewly programmed buttonfor five seconds. If the lightstays on or the garage doormoves, programming iscomplete.

. If the indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then changes to a solid lightand the garage door doesnot move, continue withprogramming Steps 4–6.

Learn or Smart Button

4. After completing Steps 1–3,locate the Learn or Smartbutton inside the garage on thegarage door opener receiver.The name and color of thebutton may vary bymanufacturer.



5. Press and release the Learn orSmart button. Step 6 must becompleted within 30 seconds ofpressing this button.

6. Inside the vehicle, press andhold the newly programmedUniversal Remote systembutton for two seconds andthen release it. If the garagedoor does not move or thelamp on the garage dooropener receiver does not flash,press and hold the samebutton a second time fortwo seconds, then release it.Again, if the door does notmove or the garage door lampdoes not flash, press and holdthe same button a third time fortwo seconds, then release it.

The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.

Repeat the process forprogramming the two remainingbuttons.

Radio Signals for Canada andSome Gate Operators

For questions or programming help,see www.homelink.com/gm or call1-800-355-3515.

Canadian radio-frequency laws andsome U.S. gate operators requiretransmitter signals to time out or quitafter several seconds oftransmission. This may not be longenough for the Universal Remotesystem to pick up the signal duringprogramming.

If the programming did not work,replace Step 2 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System” withthe following:

Press and hold the UniversalRemote system button whilepressing and releasing thehand-held transmitter button everytwo seconds until the signal hasbeen successfully accepted by theUniversal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button forat least one-half second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

Erase all programmed buttons whenvehicle ownership is terminated.

To erase:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons until the indicator lightbegins to flash. This shouldtake about 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.



Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the systembuttons:

1. Press and hold any one of thebuttons. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under“Programming the UniversalRemote System.”


170 Lighting

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . 170Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 174Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Battery Load Management . . . 177Battery Power Protection . . . . . 178Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

There are four positions:

O : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turn the headlampcontrol to O again to turn theautomatic headlamps or DRLback on.


Lighting 171

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position will only work whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

AUTO : Automatically turns on theheadlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, instrument panel lights,roof marker lamps (if equipped), andlicense plate lamps.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

2 : Turns on the headlamps withthe parking lamps and instrumentpanel lights.

When the headlamps are turned onwhile the vehicle is on, theheadlamps turn off automatically10 minutes after the ignition isturned off. When the headlamps areturned on while the vehicle is off,the headlamps will stay on for10 minutes before turning off toprevent the battery from beingdrained. Turn the headlamp controloff and then back to the headlampon position to make the headlampsstay on for an additional 10 minutes.

To keep the lamps on for more than10 minutes, the ignition must be onor in ACC/ACCESSORY.

IntelliBeam System

If equipped, this system turns thevehicle's high-beam headlamps onand off according to surroundingtraffic conditions.

The system turns the high-beamheadlamps on when it is darkenough and there is no other trafficpresent.

This light comes on in theinstrument cluster when theIntelliBeam system is enabled.

Turning On and EnablingIntelliBeam

To enable the IntelliBeam system,with the turn signal lever in theneutral position, turn the exteriorlamp control to AUTO. The blue

high-beam on light appears on theinstrument cluster when the highbeams are on.

Driving with IntelliBeam

The system only activates the highbeams when driving over 40 km/h(25 mph).

There is a sensor near the topcenter of the windshield thatautomatically controls the system.Keep this area of the windshieldclear of debris to allow for bestsystem performance.

The high-beam headlamps remainon, under the automatic control,until one of the following situationsoccurs:

. The system detects anapproaching vehicle'sheadlamps.

. The system detects a precedingvehicle's taillamps.

. The outside light is brightenough that high-beamheadlamps are not required.

. The vehicle's speed drops below20 km/h (12 mph).


172 Lighting

. The IntelliBeam system can bedisabled by the High/Low-BeamChanger or the Flash-to-Passfeature. If this happens, theHigh/Low-Beam Changer mustbe activated on then off withintwo seconds to reactivate theIntelliBeam system. Theinstrument cluster light will comeon to indicate the IntelliBeam isreactivated.See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger 0 172 andFlash-to-Pass 0 172.

The high beams may not turn offautomatically if the system cannotdetect another vehicle's lampsbecause of any of the following:

. The other vehicle's lamps aremissing, damaged, obstructedfrom view, or otherwiseundetected.

. The other vehicle's lamps arecovered with dirt, snow, and/orroad spray.

. The other vehicle's lamps cannotbe detected due to denseexhaust, smoke, fog, snow, roadspray, mist, or other airborneobstructions.

. The vehicle's windshield is dirty,cracked, or obstructed bysomething that blocks the viewof the light sensor.

. The vehicle is loaded such thatthe front end points upward,causing the light sensor to aimhigh and not detect headlampsand taillamps.

. The vehicle is being driven onwinding or hilly roads.

The automatic high-beamheadlamps may need to be disabledif any of the above conditions exist.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA reminder chime sounds when theheadlamps or parking lamps aremanually turned on, the ignition isoff, and a door is open. To disablethe chime, turn the lamps off.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerPush the turn signal lever towardthe instrument panel to change theheadlamps from low to high beam.

Pull the turn signal lever toward youand release it to return to low-beamheadlamps.

When the high-beam headlamps areon, this indicator light on theinstrument cluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use thehigh-beam headlamps to signal adriver in front of you that you wantto pass. It works even if theheadlamps are in the automaticposition.

To use it, pull the turn signal levertoward you, then release it.


Lighting 173

If the headlamps are in theautomatic position or on low beam,the high-beam headlamps will turnon. Depending on the type ofheadlamp, they will either turn offafter a short duration or stay on aslong as you hold the lever towardyou. The high-beam indicator on theinstrument cluster will come on.Release the lever to return tonormal operation.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of the vehicle duringthe day. Fully functional DRL arerequired on all vehicles first sold inCanada.

The DRL system comes on whenthe following conditions are met:

. The ignition is on.

. The exterior lamp control isin AUTO.

. The transmission is not inP (Park).

. The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

When the DRL system is on, onlythe DRL are on. The taillamps,sidemarker lamps, instrument panellights, and other lamps will notbe on.

When it begins to get dark, theautomatic headlamp systemswitches from DRL to theheadlamps.

To turn off the DRL, turn the exteriorlamp control to O and then release.For vehicles first sold in Canada, offwill only work when the vehicle isparked.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen the exterior lamp control isset to AUTO and it is dark enoughoutside, the headlamps come onautomatically.

There is a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel. Do not cover thesensor, otherwise the headlampswill come on when they are notneeded.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately. If itis light outside when the vehicleleaves the garage, there is a slightdelay before the automaticheadlamp system changes to theDRL. During that delay, theinstrument cluster may not be asbright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness control


174 Lighting

is in the full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 176.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will turn off or maychange to Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

The automatic headlamp systemturns off when the exterior lampcontrol is turned to O or the ignitionis off.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers arenot operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control to Oor; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| : Press this button to make thefront and rear turn signal lampsflash on and off. Press again to turnthe flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the vehicle's turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Move the turn signal lever all theway up or down to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever for lessthan one second until the arrowstarts to flash to signal a lanechange. This causes the turnsignals to automatically flash threetimes. It will flash six times if Tow/Haul Mode is active. Holding theturn signal lever for more thanone second will cause the turnsignals to flash until the lever isreleased.


Lighting 175

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a signal bulb couldbe burned out.

Replace any burned out bulbs. If abulb is not burned out, check thefuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers 0 309.

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chimesounds at each flash of the turnsignal. The message TURNSIGNAL ON will also appear in theDriver Information Center (DIC). Toturn the chime and message off,move the turn signal lever to the offposition.

Fog Lamps

If equipped with fog lamps, thebutton is on the exterior lampcontrol, to the left of the steeringcolumn.

The ignition must be on for the foglamps to come on.

# : Press to turn the fog lamps onor off. A light will come on in theinstrument cluster.

When the fog lamps are turned on,the parking lamps automaticallyturn on.

When the headlamps are changedto high beam, the fog lamps also gooff. When the high-beam headlampsare turned off, the fog lamps willcome on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be on withthe fog lamps.


176 Lighting

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel lights and isnext to the exterior lamp control.

D : Move the thumbwheel up ordown to brighten or dim the lights.

Dome Lamps

There are dome lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

OFF : Turns the lamps off, evenwhen a door is open.

DOOR : The lamps come onautomatically when a door isopened.

ON : Turns all dome lamps on.

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped. To operate, the ignitionmust be on or in ACC/ACCESSORYor using Retained AccessoryPower (RAP).


Lighting 177

Pressm orn next to each readinglamp to turn it on or off.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingSome exterior lamps and the interiorlamps turn on briefly at night, or inareas with limited lighting, when Kis pressed on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. When adoor is opened, the interior lampscome on if the dome lamp control isin the DOOR position. After about30 seconds the exterior lamps turnoff. Entry lighting can be disabledmanually by changing the ignitionout of the OFF position, or bypressing the RKE transmitter Qbutton.

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” underVehicle Personalization 0 158.

Exit LightingSome exterior lamps and interiorlamps come on at night, or in areaswith limited lighting, when the driverdoor is opened after the ignition isturned off. The exterior lamps and

interior lamps remain on for a setamount of time, then automaticallyturn off.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamp control off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 158.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM), whichestimates the battery's temperatureand state of charge. It then adjuststhe voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. The voltmetergauge or the voltage display on theDriver Information Center (DIC),if equipped, may show the voltage


178 Lighting

moving up or down. This is normal.If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC message mightbe displayed and it is recommendedthat the driver reduce the electricalloads as much as possible.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome andreading lamps if they are left on formore than 10 minutes when theignition is off. This will keep thebattery from running down.

Exterior Lighting BatterySaverThe exterior lamps turn off about10 minutes after the ignition isturned off, if the parking lamps orheadlamps have been manually lefton. This protects against drainingthe battery. To restart the 10-minutetimer, turn the exterior lamp controlto the O position and then back to

the; or2 position.

To keep the lamps on for more than10 minutes, the ignition must be onor in ACC/ACCESSORY.


Infotainment System 179

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Introduction

InfotainmentSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE),and voice or speech recognition,if equipped. It also includesinformation on settings.


180 Climate Controls

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Rear Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Climate ControlSystems

Dual Automatic ClimateControl SystemWith this system the heating,cooling, and ventilation in thevehicle can be controlled. Someclimate control settings can bechanged. See “Climate and AirQuality” under VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

1. Driver Temperature Control

2. A/C (Air Conditioning)

3. Air Delivery Mode Controls

4. Fan Control

5. Defrost

6. Passenger TemperatureControl

7. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)

8. Rear Window Defogger

9. RCTRL (Rear Climate ControlLockout)

10. Rear Temperature Control

11. Rear Air Delivery Mode Control

12. Rear Fan Control

13. Front Climate Control PowerButton

14. Rear AUTO (AutomaticOperation)

15. Rear Climate Control PowerButton

16. Air Recirculation



Climate Controls 181

Front Climate Controls

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.

When AUTO is lit, all four functionsoperate automatically. Each functioncan also be manually set and thesetting is displayed. Functions notmanually set will continue to beautomatically controlled, even if theAUTO indicator is not lit.

To place the system inautomatic mode:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the driver and passengertemperature.

To find your comfort setting,start with 22 °C (72 °F) andallow the system time tostabilize. Then adjust thetemperature as needed for bestcomfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather.

The recirculation light will not comeon when automatically controlled.Press@ to manually selectrecirculation; press it again to selectoutside air.

Do not cover the solar sensor on thetop of the instrument panel near thewindshield. This sensor regulatesair temperature based on sun load.See “Sensors” later in this section.

Manual Operation

O : Press to turn the climate controlsystem on or off. When off isselected, the system will stop airfrom flowing into the cabin. If on isselected, a button is pressed, or aknob is turned, the climate controlsystem will turn on and operate atthe current setting.

9 : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. PressAUTO to return to automaticoperation.

The maximum auto fan speed canbe adjusted. See “Climate and AirQuality” under VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

Driver and PassengerTemperature Control : Thetemperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver andpassenger.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the driver or passengertemperature setting.

SYNC : Press to link the passengerand rear climate temperaturesettings to the driver setting. TheSYNC indicator light will turn on.When the passenger or rear climatesettings are adjusted, the SYNCindicator light turns off.

Air Delivery Mode Control : PressY,\,[ , or- to change thedirection of the airflow. An indicatorlight comes on in the selected modebutton.



Changing the mode cancels theautomatic operation of the mode.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Y : Air is directed to the instrumentpanel outlets.

\ : Air is divided between theinstrument panel and floor outlets.

[ : Air is directed to the flooroutlets, with some to the windshield,side window outlets, and secondrow floor outlets.

- : This mode clears the windowsof fog or moisture. Air is directed tothe windshield, floor outlets, andside window vents.

0 : Press to clear the windshieldof fog or frost more quickly. Air isdirected to the windshield and theside window vents. The systemautomatically forces outside air intothe vehicle and the air conditioningcompressor will run, unless theoutside temperature is close tofreezing.

Do not drive the vehicle until allwindows are clear.

See Air Vents 0 185.

A/C : Press to turn the airconditioning system on or off. Anindicator light comes on to showthat the air conditioning is enabled.If the fan is turned off, the airconditioner will not run. The A/Clight will stay on even if the outsidetemperatures are below freezing.

@ : Press to turn on recirculation.An indicator light comes on. Air isrecirculated to quickly cool theinside of the vehicle. It can also beused to help reduce outside air andodors that enter the vehicle. The airconditioning compressor also comeson when this mode is activated.

Auto Defog : The climate controlsystem uses a sensor toautomatically detect high humidityinside the vehicle. When highhumidity is detected, the climatecontrol system may adjust tooutside air supply, turn on the airconditioner, and direct more air tothe windshield. If the climate controlsystem does not detect possiblewindow fogging, it returns to normaloperation. To turn Auto Defog off or

on, see “Climate and Air Quality”under Vehicle Personalization0 158.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

K : Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window defogger is on.

The rear window defogger onlyworks when the ignition is in on. Thedefogger turns off if the ignition isturned off or to ACC/ACCESSORY.

The rear window defogger can beset to automatic operation. WhenAuto Rear Defog is selected, therear window defogger turns onautomatically when the vehicle isfirst started in cold weather andturns off when the vehicle iswarmed. To turn Auto Rear Defogon or off, see “Climate and AirQuality” under VehiclePersonalization 0 158.



Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rearwindow can damage the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

Heated Mirror : If equipped withheated outside mirrors, the mirrorsheat to help clear fog or frost fromthe surface of the mirror when therear window defog button ispressed. See Heated Mirrors 0 54.

Rear Climate Controls

O : Press to turn the rear climatecontrol system on or off.

AUTO : Press AUTO to control therear passenger temperature, airdelivery, and fan speed. AUTOappears in the display whenautomatic operation is active. If anyof the climate control settingsexcept rear temperature aremanually adjusted, this cancels fullautomatic operation.

Fan Control : Press up or down toincrease or decrease the rearpassenger area fan speed.

Air Delivery Mode Control : Pressup or down to change the directionof the rear passenger airflow.Repeatedly press the switch untilthe desired mode appears on thedisplay. Multiple presses will cyclethrough the delivery selections.

Temperature Control : Press up ordown to increase or decrease theairflow temperature into the rearpassenger area.

RCTRL : Press to lock or unlockcontrol of the rear climate controlsystem from the rear seatpassengers. When locked, the rearclimate control can only be adjustedfrom the front seat.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation

If equipped with the remote startfeature, the climate control systemwill come on when the vehicle isstarted remotely, depending on theoutside temperature. The rearwindow defogger and heated seats,

if equipped, may also come on.See Remote Vehicle Start 0 39 andHeated and Ventilated Front Seats0 67.

Sensors

The solar sensor monitors the solarheat. Do not cover the solar sensoror the system will not work properly.

There is also an exteriortemperature sensor behind the frontgrille. This sensor reads the outsideair temperature and helps maintainthe temperature inside the vehicle.Any cover on the front of thevehicle, including a snowplow, couldcause a false reading in thedisplayed temperature.



The climate control system uses theinformation from these sensors tomaintain comfort settings byadjusting the outlet temperature, fanspeed, and air delivery mode. Thesystem may also supply cooler air tothe side of the vehicle facing thesun. The recirculation mode will alsobe used as needed to maintain cooloutlet temperatures.

Rear Climate ControlSystemThe rear climate control system islocated on the rear of the centerconsole storage. The rear climatesettings can be adjusted with thissystem.

1. Fan Control


3. MODE (Air Delivery ModeControl)

4. TEMP (Temperature Control)

5. Heated Rear Seats (IfEquipped)

If the dual automatic climate controlsystem rear climate control lockoutfeature is locked, the rear climatecontrol settings can only beadjusted from the front seat.

Automatic Operation

AUTO : Press AUTO toautomatically control thetemperature, air delivery, and fanspeed for rear seat passengers. A isindicated in the display whenautomatic operation is active.

If any of the rear climate controlsettings are manually adjusted, fullautomatic operation is cancelled.Press AUTO to return to fullautomatic operation.

The display only indicates climatecontrol functions when the system isin rear independent mode.

Manual Operation

9 : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Turncompletely counterclockwise to turnthe fan/power off.

TEMP : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the airflow temperatureinto the passenger area. If theSYNC button is pressed on the front



climate controls, the rear climatetemperature is linked to the drivertemperature setting.

MODE : Press to change thedirection of the airflow in the vehicle.Repeatedly press the button untilthe desired mode appears on thedisplay. Multiple presses will cyclethrough the delivery selections.

M or L : If equipped, press M or Lto heat the left or right outboard seatcushion. See Heated Rear Seats0 69.

Air VentsAdjustable air vents are in thecenter and on the side of theinstrument panel.

1. Slider Knob

2. Thumbwheel

Move the slider knobs (1) to changethe direction of the airflow.

Use the thumbwheels (2) near theair vents to open or close off theairflow.

Operation Tips

. Clear away any ice, snow,or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatcould block the flow of air intothe vehicle.

. Clear snow off the hood toimprove visibility and helpdecrease moisture drawn intothe vehicle.

. When you enter a vehicle in coldweather, press the fan up buttonto the maximum fan level beforedriving. This helps clear theintake ducts of snow andmoisture, and reduces thechance of fogging the inside ofthe window.

. Keep the air path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.



Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter reduces the dust, pollen,and other airborne irritants fromoutside air that is pulled into thevehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule 0 370.To find out what type of filter to use,see Maintenance ReplacementParts 0 380.

1. Open the glove box completely.

2. Disconnect the glove box doordamper string from the glovebox door assembly. A pen orpencil may be inserted throughthe end of the damper string toprevent the string from slippinginside the door assembly.

3. Remove the six screws andremove the access plate.

4. Release the two tabs holdingthe service door. Open theservice door and remove theold filter.

5. Install the new air filter.

6. Close the service door andsecure the tabs.

7. Reverse the steps to reinstallthe glove box.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.



ServiceAll vehicles have a label underhoodthat identifies the refrigerant used inthe vehicle. The refrigerant systemshould only be serviced by trainedand certified technicians. The airconditioning evaporator shouldnever be repaired or replaced byone from a salvage vehicle.It should only be replaced by a newevaporator to ensure proper andsafe operation.

During service, all refrigerantsshould be reclaimed with properequipment. Venting refrigerantsdirectly to the atmosphere is harmfulto the environment and may alsocreate unsafe conditions based oninhalation, combustion, frostbite,or other health-based concerns.


188 Driving and Operating

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 190Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 191Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 197Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 198Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 200Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . 204Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Ignition Positions (KeylessAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 209Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . 213Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Active Fuel Management . . . . . 214Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . 216Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Drive SystemsFour-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . 229

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . 231Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . 232Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Automatic Level Control . . . . . . 232

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . 235

Driver Assistance SystemsDriver Assistance Systems . . . 242Assistance Systems forParking or Backing . . . . . . . . . . 243

Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . 250Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . 252

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 255Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255


Driving and Operating 189

E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Trailer TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 273

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, keepyour eyes on the road, keep yourhands on the steering wheel, andfocus your attention on driving.

. Do not use a phone indemanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.



Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem and the navigation system,if equipped, including pairing andusing a cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe seat belt. See Seat Belts 0 76.

. Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:

. Keep enough distance betweenyou and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.



Steering

Electric Power Steering

This vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time while thevehicle is not moving, power assistmay be reduced.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel, and isheld in that position for an extendedperiod of time, power steering assistmay be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.

. Reduce speed before entering acurve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.



3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:

. Braking Skid — wheels are notrolling.

. Steering or Cornering Skid —too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:

. Ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.

The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingFour-wheel-drive vehicles can beused for off-road driving. Vehicleswithout four-wheel drive and

vehicles not equipped with AllTerrain (AT) or On-Off Road (OOR)tires must not be driven off-roadexcept on a level, solid surface. Forcontact information about theoriginal equipment tires, see thewarranty manual.

One of the best ways for successfuloff-road driving is to control thespeed.

{ Warning

When driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in directioncan easily throw you out ofposition. This could cause you tolose control and crash. You andyour passengers should alwayswear seat belts.

Before Driving Off-Road. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work completed.

. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,and check inflation pressure inall tires, including the spare,if equipped.



. Read all the information aboutfour-wheel-drive vehicles in thismanual.

. Remove any underbody airdeflector, if equipped. Re-attachthe air deflector after off-roaddriving.

. Know the local laws that apply tooff-road driving.

To gain more ground clearance ifneeded, it may be necessary toremove the front fascia lower airdam, if equipped. However, drivingwithout the air dam reduces fueleconomy.

Caution

Operating the vehicle forextended periods without the frontfascia lower air dam installed cancause improper airflow to theengine. Reattach the front fasciaair dam after off-road driving.

Loading the Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ Warning

. Unsecured cargo on theload floor can be tossedabout when driving overrough terrain. You or yourpassengers can be struckby flying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

. Keep cargo in the cargoarea as far forward and aslow as possible. Theheaviest things should beon the floor, forward of therear axle.

. Heavy loads on the roofraise the vehicle's center ofgravity, making it more likelyto roll over. You can beseriously or fatally injured ifthe vehicle rolls over. Putheavy loads inside thecargo area, not on the roof.

For more information about loadingthe vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limits0 200 and Tires 0 320.

Environmental Concerns. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenset aside for public off-roadrecreational driving and obey allposted regulations.

. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturbwildlife.

. Do not park over things thatburn. See Parking over ThingsThat Burn 0 214.

Driving on Hills

Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding ofwhat the vehicle can and cannot do.

{ Warning

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. Driving up hillscan cause the vehicle to stall.Driving down hills can cause loss

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

of control. Driving across hills cancause a rollover. You could beinjured or killed. Do not drive onsteep hills.

Before driving on a hill, assess thesteepness, traction, andobstructions. If the terrain aheadcannot be seen, get out of thevehicle and walk the hill beforedriving further.

When driving on hills:

. Use a low gear and keep a firmgrip on the steering wheel.

. Maintain a slow speed.

. When possible, drive straight upor down the hill.

. Slow down when approachingthe top of the hill.

. Use headlamps even during theday to make the vehicle morevisible.

{ Warning

Driving to the top of a hill at highspeed can cause an accident.There could be a drop-off,embankment, cliff, or evenanother vehicle. You could beseriously injured or killed. As younear the top of a hill, slow downand stay alert.

. Never go downhill forward orbackward with either thetransmission or transfer case inN (Neutral). The brakes couldoverheat and you could losecontrol.

{ Warning

If the vehicle has the two-speedautomatic or electronic transfercase, shifting the transfer case toN (Neutral) can cause yourvehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in P (Park). This isbecause the N (Neutral) position

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

on the transfer case overrides thetransmission. You or someoneelse could be injured. If leavingthe vehicle, set the parking brakeand shift the transmission toP (Park). Shift the transfer case toany position but N (Neutral).

. When driving down a hill, keepthe vehicle headed straightdown. Use a low gear becausethe engine will work with thebrakes to slow the vehicle andhelp keep the vehicle undercontrol.

{ Warning

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and you orothers could be injured or killed.Apply the brakes lightly when

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

descending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed undercontrol.

If the vehicle stalls on a hill:

1. Apply the brakes to stop thevehicle, and then apply theparking brake.

2. Shift into P (Park) and thenrestart the engine.

. If driving uphill when thevehicle stalls, shift toR (Reverse), release theparking brake, and backstraight down.

. Never try to turn the vehiclearound. If the hill is steepenough to stall the vehicle,it is steep enough to causeit to roll over.

. If you cannot make it up thehill, back straight downthe hill.

. Never back down a hill inN (Neutral) using only thebrake. The vehicle can rollbackward quickly and youcould lose control.

. If driving downhill when thevehicle stalls, shift to alower gear, release theparking brake, and drivestraight down the hill.

3. If the vehicle cannot berestarted after stalling, set theparking brake, shift intoP (Park), and turn thevehicle off.

3.1. Leave the vehicle andseek help.

3.2. Stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if itrolled downhill.

. Avoid turns that take the vehicleacross the incline of the hill.A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steep todrive across. Driving across anincline puts more weight on the

downhill wheels, which couldcause a downhill slide or arollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it — a rock, a rut,etc. — and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline moresevere. If a rock is driven acrosswith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

. If an incline must be drivenacross, and the vehicle starts toslide, turn downhill. This shouldhelp straighten out the vehicleand prevent the side slipping.



{ Warning

Getting out of the vehicle on thedownhill side when stoppedacross an incline is dangerous.If the vehicle rolls over, you couldbe crushed or killed. Always getout on the uphill side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

Use a low gear when driving inmud — the deeper the mud, thelower the gear. Keep the vehiclemoving to avoid getting stuck.

Traction changes when driving onsand. On loose sand, such as onbeaches or sand dunes, the tirestend to sink into the sand. Thisaffects steering, accelerating, andbraking. Drive at a reduced speedand avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers.

Traction is reduced on hard packedsnow and ice and it is easy to losecontrol. Reduce vehicle speed whendriving on hard packed snowand ice.

{ Warning

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous. Iceconditions vary greatly and thevehicle could fall through the ice;you and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.

Driving in Water

{ Warning

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Traction could be lost, and thevehicle could roll over. Do notdrive through rushing water.

Caution

Do not drive through standingwater if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe. Deep water can damage theaxle and other vehicle parts.

If the standing water is not too deep,drive through it slowly. At fasterspeeds, water can get into theengine and cause it to stall. Stallingcan occur if the exhaust pipe isunder water. Do not turn off theignition when driving through water.If the exhaust pipe is under water,the engine will not start. When goingthrough water, the brakes get wetand it may take longer to stop. See“Driving on Wet Roads” later in thissection.



After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody orchassis, or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, driveline,steering, suspension, wheels, tires,and exhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

More frequent maintenance serviceis required. See the MaintenanceSchedule 0 370.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is

wet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

. Allow extra following distance.

. Pass with caution.

. Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires 0 320.

. Turn off cruise control.



Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips include:

. Keep the vehicle serviced and ingood shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes andloss of steering assist. Alwayshave the engine running and thevehicle in gear.

. Drive at speeds that keep thevehicle in its own lane. Do notswing wide or cross thecenter line.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(e.g., stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (e.g., falling rocks area,winding roads, long grades,passing or no-passing zones)and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Snow or ice between the tires andthe road creates less traction orgrip, so drive carefully. Wet ice canoccur at about 0 °C (32 °F) whenfreezing rain begins to fall. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rainuntil roads can be treated.

For Slippery Road Driving:

. Accelerate gently. Acceleratingtoo quickly causes the wheels tospin and makes the surfaceunder the tires slick.

. Turn on Traction Control. SeeTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 229.

. The Antilock Brake System(ABS) improves vehicle stabilityduring hard stops, but thebrakes should be applied soonerthan when on dry pavement.See Antilock Brake System(ABS) 0 227.



. Allow greater following distanceand watch for slippery spots. Icypatches can occur on otherwiseclear roads in shaded areas.The surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear.Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

. Turn off cruise control.

Blizzard Conditions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place andsignal for help. Stay with the vehicleunless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program 0 390. To gethelp and keep everyone in thevehicle safe:


. Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO), whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

. Clear snow from the base ofthe vehicle, especially anyblocking the exhaust pipe.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the vehicle sidethat is away from the wind,to bring in fresh air.


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to circulate the airinside the vehicle and set

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the fan speed to the highestsetting. See “ClimateControl Systems.”

For more information about CO,see Engine Exhaust 0 215.

To save fuel, run the engine forshort periods to warm the vehicleand then shut the engine off andpartially close the window. Movingabout to keep warm also helps.

If it takes time for help to arrive,when running the engine, push theaccelerator pedal slightly so theengine runs faster than the idlespeed. This keeps the batterycharged to restart the vehicle and tosignal for help with the headlamps.Do this as little as possible, tosave fuel.



If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 229.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forth

between R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle 0 355.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle mayshow how much weight it was

designed to carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoreduce stopping distance,damage the tires, and shortenthe life of the vehicle.



Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar). The tire and loadinginformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipment

tires (3) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (4).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires 0 320and Tire Pressure 0 327.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It mayshow the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axles. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–1. Locate the statement "The

combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount ofcargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals1400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred to



your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing 0 262 forimportant information on towing atrailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs)

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs)

Example 2


2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =136 kg (750 lbs)

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)

Example 3


2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs)

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to the vehicle's tire andloading information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined



weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to thecenter pillar (B-pillar). The labelmay shows the size of thevehicle's original tires and theinflation pressures needed toobtain the gross weight capacityof the vehicle. This is calledGross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsomay show the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). To find out the actualloads on the front and rearaxles, weigh the vehicle at aweigh station. Your dealer canhelp with this. Be sure to spreadyour load equally on both sidesof the centerline.

The Certification/Tire label mayalso include information aboutthe Front Axle ReserveCapacity.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear Gross

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoreduce stopping distance,damage the tires, and shortenthe life of the vehicle.

Caution

Overloading the vehicle maycause damage. Repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not overload thevehicle.

The label will help decide howmuch cargo and installedequipment the truck can carry.



Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not change theweight ratings. Ask your dealerto help load the vehicle theright way.

{ Warning

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. When you carrysomething inside thevehicle, secure itwhenever you can.

. Do not leave a seatfolded down unless youneed to.

There is also important loadinginformation for off-road driving inthis manual. See “Loading YourVehicle for Off-Road Driving”under Off-Road Driving 0 192.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Keep the vehicle speed at88 km/h (55 mph) or less forthe first 805 km (500mi).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can mean

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towing0 262 for the trailer towingcapabilities of the vehicleand more information.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Adjustable Throttle andBrake PedalIf equipped, the position of thethrottle and brake pedals can bechanged.

The pedals can only be adjustedwhen the vehicle is in P (Park).

The switch used to adjust thepedals is to the left of the steeringwheel.

Press the switch to the left to movethe pedals closer to your body.Press the switch to the right to movethe pedals away.

Before you start driving, fully pressthe brake pedal to confirm theadjustment is right for you.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction, which lets pedal settingsbe saved and recalled. See MemorySeats 0 64.

Ignition Positions(Keyless Access)

Vehicles equipped with KeylessAccess have pushbutton starting.

The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter must be in the vehicle forthe system to operate. If thepushbutton start is not working, thevehicle may be near a strong radioantenna signal causing interferenceto the Keyless Access system.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access)0 31 or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeylessAccess) 0 33.



To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, and the brake pedalmust be applied.

Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF (No Indicator Lights) : Whenthe vehicle is stopped, pressENGINE START/STOP once to turnthe engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 212.

If the vehicle is not in P (Park), theignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display themessage SHIFT TO PARK in theDriver Information Center (DIC).When the vehicle is shifted intoP (Park), the ignition system willturn off.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

The vehicle may have an electricsteering column lock. The lock isactivated when the ignition is turnedoff and either front door is opened.A sound may be heard as the lockactuates or releases. The steeringcolumn lock may not release withthe wheels turned off center. If thishappens, the vehicle may not start.Move the steering wheel from left toright while attempting to start thevehicle. If this does not work, thevehicle needs service.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn theignition off. On vehicles with an

automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park)to turn the ignition off.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake 0 228.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,press and hold ENGINE START/STOP for longer than two seconds,or press twice in five seconds.

ACC/ACCESSORY (AmberIndicator Light) : This mode allowssome electrical accessories to beused when the engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.



The ignition will switch from ACC/ACCESSORY to off afterfive minutes to prevent batteryrundown.

ON/RUN/START (Green IndicatorLight) : This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, andthe brake pedal applied, pressingthe button once will turn the ignitionon. Once engine cranking begins,release the button. Engine crankingwill continue until the engine starts.See Starting the Engine 0 209.

Service Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off, andthe brake pedal not applied,pressing and holding the button formore than five seconds will placethe vehicle in Service Mode. Theinstruments and audio systems willoperate as they do when the ignitionis on, but the vehicle will not be able

to be driven. The engine will notstart in Service Mode. Press thebutton again to turn the ignition off.

Ignition Positions (KeyAccess)

Vehicles with Key Access have anignition switch with four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be on or in ACC/ACCESSORYand the regular brake pedal must beapplied.

0 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF) : When the vehicle is stopped,turn the ignition switch to LOCK/

OFF to turn the engine off. RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 212.

This position locks the ignition andsteering wheel. It also locks thetransmission on automatictransmission vehicles. The key canbe removed in LOCK/OFF.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoes not work, then the vehicleneeds service.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.



2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn theignition to LOCK/OFF. Onvehicles with an automatictransmission, the shift levermust be in P (Park) to turn theignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake 0 228.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

Caution

Using a tool to force the key toturn in the ignition could causedamage to the switch or break thekey. Use the correct key, makesure it is all the way in, and turn itonly with your hand. If the keycannot be turned by hand, seeyour dealer.

1 (ACC/ACCESSORY) : Thisposition lets things like the radioand the windshield wipers operatewhile the engine is off. It alsounlocks the steering wheel. Use thisposition if the vehicle must bepushed or towed.

2 (ON/RUN) : This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument cluster warning andindicator lights. This position canalso be used for service and

diagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running. Thetransmission is also unlocked in thisposition on automatic transmissionvehicles.

If the key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. The vehicle may notstart if the battery is allowed to drainfor an extended period of time.

3 (START) : This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened and theignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF, and the key is in theignition.



Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipment0 274.

Starting Procedure (KeyAccess)

1. With your foot off theaccelerator pedal, turn theignition key to START. Whenthe engine starts, let go of thekey. The idle speed will godown as the engine gets warm.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

When the low fuel warninglamp is on and the FUELLEVEL LOW message isdisplayed in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), holdthe ignition switch in theSTART position to continueengine cranking.

Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START position

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

immediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter five to 10 seconds,especially in very cold weather(below −18 °C or 0 °F), it couldbe flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it therewhile holding the key in STARTfor up to 15 seconds. Wait atleast 15 seconds between eachtry, to allow the cranking motorto cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key andaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, dothe same thing. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.



Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Starting Procedure (KeylessAccess)

1. With the Keyless Accesssystem, the RKE transmittermust be in the vehicle. PressENGINE START/STOP with thebrake pedal applied. When theengine begins cranking, let goof the button.

The idle speed will go down asthe engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it.

If the RKE transmitter is not inthe vehicle, if there isinterference, or if the RKEbattery is low, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) willdisplay a message.

Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter five to 10 seconds,especially in very cold weather(below −18 °C or 0 °F), it couldbe flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there asyou press ENGINE START/STOP, for up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try,to allow the cranking motor tocool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the button, andthe accelerator. If the vehiclestarts briefly but then stops

again, do the same thing. Thisclears the extra gasoline fromthe engine. Do not race theengine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engineand transmission gently untilthe oil warms up and lubricatesall moving parts.

Engine Heater

{ Warning

Do not plug in the engine blockheater while the vehicle is parkedin a garage or under a carport.Property damage or personalinjury may result. Always park thevehicle in a clear open area awayfrom buildings or structures.

If equipped, the engine heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below −18 °C (0 °F). Vehicleswith an engine heater should beplugged in at least four hours beforestarting. There may be an internal



thermostat in the plug end of thecord, which will prevent engineheater operation at temperaturesabove −18 °C (0 °F).

To Use the Engine Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord is bythe left front fender, next to theengine compartment fuseblock.

Check the heater cord fordamage. If it is damaged, donot use it. See your dealer fora replacement. Inspect thecord for damage yearly.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Improper use of the heater cordor an extension cord can damagethe cord and may result inoverheating and fire.

. Plug the cord into athree-prong electrical utilityreceptacle that is protectedby a ground fault detectionfunction. An ungroundedoutlet could cause anelectric shock.

. Use a weatherproof,heavy-duty, 15 amp-ratedextension cord if needed.Failure to use therecommended extensioncord in good operatingcondition, or using adamaged heater orextension cord, could make

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

it overheat and cause a fire,property damage, electricshock, and injury.

. Do not operate the vehiclewith the heater cordpermanently attached to thevehicle. Possible heatercord and thermostatdamage could occur.

. While in use, do not let theheater cord touch vehicleparts or sharp edges. Neverclose the hood on theheater cord.

. Before starting the vehicle,unplug the cord, reattachthe cover to the plug, andsecurely fasten the cord.Keep the cord away fromany moving parts.



4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engineparts. If you do not, it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)Some vehicle accessories may beused after the ignition is turned off.

The power windows and sunroof,if equipped, will continue to work forup to 10 minutes or until any door isopened.

The infotainment system willcontinue to work for 10 minutes,until the driver door is opened,or until the ignition is turned on orplaced in ACC/ACCESSORY.

Shifting Into Park

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If the vehicle has afour-wheel-drive transfer casewith a N (Neutral) position, andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll,even if the shift lever is inP (Park). Be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear. If towing atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 259.

1. Hold the brake pedal down,then set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake 0 228.

2. Move the shift lever into theP (Park) position by pulling theshift lever toward you andmoving it up as far as it will go.

3. Be sure the transfer case is ina drive gear – not inN (Neutral).


Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set.

If you have four-wheel drive andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll,even if the shift lever is inP (Park). So be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear – not inN (Neutral).

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

And, if you leave the vehicle withthe engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. Youor others could be injured. Do notleave the vehicle with the enginerunning unless you have to.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you move the shiftlever into P (Park), hold the regularbrake pedal down. Then, see if youcan move the shift lever away fromP (Park) without first pulling it towardyou. If you can, it means that theshift lever was not fully locked intoP (Park).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. You may find it difficult

to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called torque lock. Toprevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into P (Park)properly before you leave thedriver seat.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission. You will then beable to pull the shift lever out ofP (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release system isdesigned to prevent movement ofthe shift lever out of P (Park), unlessthe ignition is on and the brakepedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 351.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, push the shift lever allthe way into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, then have the vehicleserviced soon.



Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Active Fuel ManagementVehicles with V8 engines may haveActive Fuel Management. Thissystem allows the engine to operateon either all or half of its cylinders,depending on the driving conditions.

When less power is required, suchas cruising at a constant vehiclespeed, the system will operate inthe half cylinder mode, allowing thevehicle to achieve better fueleconomy. When greater powerdemands are required, such asaccelerating from a stop, passing,or merging onto a freeway, thesystem will maintain full-cylinderoperation.

If the vehicle has an Active FuelManagement indicator, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 151 formore information on using thisdisplay.

Extended ParkingIt is better not to park with thevehicle running. If the vehicle is leftwhile running, follow the propersteps to be sure the vehicle will notmove and there is adequateventilation.See Shifting Into Park 0 212 andEngine Exhaust 0 215.

For vehicles with pushbutton start,if the vehicle is left parked whilerunning and the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter is outsidethe vehicle, the vehicle will turn offafter one hour.

If the vehicle is left parked whilerunning and the RKE transmitter isinside, the vehicle will turn off aftertwo hours.

Vehicles without pushbutton startwill run indefinitely, or until theignition is turned off.

Automatic Transmission

The timer will reset if the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park) while it isrunning.

Manual Transmission

The timer will reset if the vehiclespeed is greater than 4 km/h(2.5 mph).



Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO), which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation(parking garages, tunnels,deep snow that may blockunderbody airflow or tailpipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified,damaged, or improperlyrepaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with thewindows completely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park 0 212 andEngine Exhaust 0 215.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 259.



AutomaticTransmissionIf equipped, there is an electronicshift lever position indicator withinthe instrument cluster. This displaycomes on when the ignition isturned on.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode 0 218.

P : This position locks the drivewheels. Use P (Park) when startingthe engine because the vehiclecannot move easily. When parkedon a hill, especially when thevehicle has a heavy load, you mightnotice an increase in the effort toshift out of P (Park). See “TorqueLock” under Shifting Into Park0 212.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 212 andDriving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 259.

{ Warning

If you have four-wheel drive, thevehicle will be free to roll — evenif the shift lever is in P (Park) — ifthe transfer case is in N (Neutral).

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

So, be sure the transfer case is ina drive gear, Two-Wheel DriveHigh or Four-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive Low — not inN (Neutral). See Shifting Into Park0 212.

R : Use this gear to back up.

Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck 0 200.



N : In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. Torestart the engine when the vehicleis already moving, useN (Neutral) only.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

Caution

A transmission hot message maydisplay if the automatictransmission fluid is too hot.Driving under this condition candamage the vehicle. Stop and idlethe engine to cool the automatictransmission fluid. This messageclears when the transmission fluidhas cooled sufficiently.

D : This position is for normaldriving. If more power is needed forpassing, press the acceleratorpedal down.

Use D (Drive) and Tow/Haul Modewhen towing a trailer, carrying aheavy load, driving on steep hills,or driving off-road. Shift thetransmission to a lower gearselection if the transmission shiftstoo often.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control 0 192.

The vehicle has a shift stabilizationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current drivingconditions in order to reduce rapidupshifts and downshifts. This shiftstabilization feature is designed todetermine, before making anupshift, if the engine is able tomaintain vehicle speed by analyzingthings such as vehicle speed,throttle position, and vehicle load.If the shift stabilization featuredetermines that a current vehiclespeed cannot be maintained, thetransmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear.In some cases, this could appear tobe a delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

The transmission uses adaptiveshift controls. The adaptive shiftcontrol process continuallycompares key shift parameters topre-programmed ideal shifts storedin the transmission’s computer. Thetransmission constantly makesadjustments to improve vehicleperformance according to how thevehicle is being used, such as witha heavy load or when the



temperature changes. During thisadaptive shift control process,shifting might feel different as thetransmission determines the bestsettings.

When temperatures are very cold,the transmission's gear shiftingcould be delayed providing morestable shifts until the engine warmsup. Shifts could be more noticeablewith a cold transmission. Thisdifference in shifting is normal.

L : This position allows selection ofa range of gears appropriate forcurrent driving conditions.If equipped, see “Range SelectionMode” under Manual Mode 0 218.

Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If the vehicleis stuck, do not spin the tires.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle inplace.

Normal Mode Grade Braking

This mode is enabled when thevehicle is started, but is not enabledin Range Selection Mode. It assistsin maintaining desired vehiclespeeds when driving on downhillgrades by using the engine andtransmission to slow the vehicle.The first time the system engagesfor each ignition cycle, a DICmessage will be displayed.

To disable or enable Normal ModeGrade Braking within the currentignition cycle, press and hold theTow/Haul button for five seconds.When the button is released, therequested mode change is made.A DIC message displays.

For other forms of grade braking,see Tow/Haul Mode 0 222 andCruise Control 0 233.

Kickdown Mode

The accelerator pedal provides anadditional downshift after pressingthrough the kickdown feature.

It requires extra pedal pressure nearthe end of its travel to engage.

Manual Mode

Range Selection Mode

If equipped, Range Selection Modehelps control the vehicle'stransmission and vehicle speedwhile driving downhill or towing atrailer by letting you select a desiredrange of gears.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toL (Manual Mode).



2. Press the plus/minus buttonson the shift lever to select thedesired range of gears forcurrent driving conditions.

Hold the plus/minus buttons on theshift lever to select the highest orlowest range available for thecurrent vehicle speed.

When the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode), anumber displays next to the L,indicating the current transmissionrange.

This number is the highest gear thatthe transmission will command whileoperating in L (Manual Mode). Allgears below that number areavailable. As driving conditionschange, the transmission canautomatically shift to lower gears.For example, when 5 (Fifth) isselected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth)gears are automatically shifted bythe transmission, but 6 (Sixth)cannot be used until the plus/minusbutton on the shift lever is used tochange to the range.

When the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode), adownshift may occur. The gear thatthe transmission is operating inwhen the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode)determines if a downshift occurs.See the following chart.



6 Speed Transmission

Gear before shifting fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode)

6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st

Range after shifting fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode)

L4 L4 L3 L2 L2 L1

Low Traction Mode

Low Traction Mode assists invehicle acceleration when roadconditions are slippery, such as withice or snow. While the vehicle is at astop, select L2 using RangeSelection Mode. This will limittorque to the wheels and help toprevent the tires from spinning.



10 Speed Transmission

Gear before shifting fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode)

10th 9th 8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st

Range after shifting fromD (Drive) to L (ManualMode) - Tow/Haul not engaged

L7 L7 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L3 L2 L1

Range after shifting fromD (Drive) to L (ManualMode) - Tow/Haul engaged

L7 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L3 L3 L2 L1

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 222.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.

Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If the vehicle

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

is stuck, do not spin the tires.When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle inplace.



Tow/Haul Mode

The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts thetransmission shift pattern to reduceshift cycling. This providesincreased performance, vehiclecontrol, and enhanced transmissionand engine cooling when drivingdown steep hills or mountaingrades, towing, or hauling heavyloads.

The selector button is on the end ofthe shift lever. Turn the Tow/HaulMode on and off by pressing thebutton. When the Tow/Haul Mode isenabled, a light on the instrumentcluster will come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light 0 146 andHill and Mountain Roads 0 198.

Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” underTowing Equipment 0 267.

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking isonly enabled while the Tow/HaulMode is selected and the vehicle isnot in the Range Selection Mode.See “Tow/Haul Mode” listedpreviously and Manual Mode 0 218.Tow/Haul Mode Grade Brakingassists in maintaining desiredvehicle speeds when driving ondownhill grades by using the engineand transmission to slow thevehicle.

To disable or enable Tow/HaulGrade Braking within the currentignition cycle, press and hold theTow/Haul button for five seconds.When the button is released, therequested mode change is made.A DIC message is displayed.

See Towing Equipment 0 267.

For other forms of grade braking,see Automatic Transmission 0 216and Cruise Control 0 233.

Drive Systems

Four-Wheel DriveIf equipped, four-wheel driveengages the front axle for extratraction.

Caution

Do not drive on clean, dry

pavement in 4 m and 4 n (ifequipped) for an extended periodof time. These conditions maycause premature wear on thevehicle’s powertrain.

Driving on clean, dry pavement in 4m or 4 n may:

. Cause a vibration to be felt inthe steering system.

. Cause tires to wear faster.

. Make the transfer case harder toshift, and cause it to run noisier.



{ Warning

Shifting the transfer case toN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). You or someone elsecould be seriously injured. Besure to set the parking brakebefore placing the transfer case inN (Neutral). See Parking Brake0 228.

Caution

Extended high-speed operation in

4 n may damage or shorten thelife of the drivetrain.

Engagement noise and bump whenshifting between 4 n and 4 m or fromN (Neutral), with the engine running,is normal.

Shifting into 4 n will turn TractionControl and StabiliTrak off. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 229.

Two Speed AutomaticTransfer Case

If equipped, use the transfer caseknob next to the steering wheel toshift into and out of four-wheel drive.

All of the lights will blink on then offmomentarily when the ignitionturned on. The light that remains onwill indicate the state of thetransfer case.

If the indicator mark on the switchdoes not match up with the lightthen that likely means the switchwas moved when the ignitionwas off.

The indicator mark on the switchmust line up with the indicator lightbefore a shift can be commanded.To command a shift rotate thetransfer case switch to the newdesired position. The light will blinkmeaning that the shift is in progress.When the shift is completed the newposition will be illuminated. If thetransfer case cannot complete ashift command, it will go back to itslast chosen setting.

The settings are:

N (Neutral) : Use only when thevehicle needs to be towed.See Recreational Vehicle Towing0 355 or Towing the Vehicle 0 355.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Usefor driving on most streets andhighways. The front axle is notengaged. This setting provides thebest fuel economy.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive) : Use when road surfacetraction conditions are variable.When driving in AUTO, the frontaxle is engaged, and the vehicle'spower is sent to the front and rearwheels automatically based on



driving conditions. This settingprovides slightly lower fuel economythan 2 m.Do not use AUTO mode,if equipped, to park on a steepgrade with poor traction such as ice,snow, mud, or gravel. In AUTOmode only the rear wheels will holdthe vehicle from sliding whenparked. If parking on a steep grade,use 4 m to keep all four wheelsengaged.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Usethis position when extra traction isneeded, such as when driving onsnowy or icy roads, whenoff-roading, or when plowing snow.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : Thissetting engages the front axle anddelivers extra torque. Choose 4 nwhen driving off-road in deep sand,deep mud, or deep snow, and whileclimbing or descending steep hills.

Shifting into 4 n will turn TractionControl and StabiliTrak off. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 229.

Shifting Into 4 m or AUTO

Turn the knob to the 4 m or AUTOposition at any speed, except from 4n. The indicator light will flash whileshifting and will remain on when theshift is completed.

Shifting Into 2 m

Turn the knob to 2 m at any speed,except when shifting from 4 n. Theindicator light will flash while shiftingand will remain on when the shift iscompleted.

Shifting Into 4 n

When 4 n is engaged, keep vehiclespeed below 72 km/h (45 mph).

To shift:

1. The ignition must be on andthe vehicle must be stopped ormoving less than5 km/h (3 mph) with thetransmission in N (Neutral). It isbest for the vehicle to bemoving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).

2. Turn the knob to 4 n. Wait for

the 4 n indicator light to stopflashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

Caution

Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested modeindicator light has stoppedflashing could damage thetransfer case.

If the transmission is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),the 4 n indicator light will flash for30 seconds and not complete theshift. After 30 seconds the transfercase will shift to 4 m. Turn the knob

to 4 m to display the indicator. Withthe vehicle moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph), and the transmission inN (Neutral), attempt the shift again.



Shifting Out of 4 nTo shift:

1. The vehicle must be stopped ormoving less than 5 km/h(3 mph) with the transmissionin N (Neutral) and the ignitionon. It is best for the vehicle tobe moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).

2. Turn the knob to 4 m, AUTO,or 2 m. Wait for the 4 m, AUTO,or 2 m indicator light to stopflashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

Caution

Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested modeindicator light has stoppedflashing could damage thetransfer case.

If the transmission is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),the 4 m, AUTO, or 2 m indicator lightwill flash for 30 seconds but will not

complete the shift. With the vehiclemoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph),and the transmission in N (Neutral),attempt the shift again.

Shifting Into N (Neutral)

To shift into N (Neutral):

1. Park the vehicle on a levelsurface.

2. Set the parking brake andpress and hold the brakepedal. See Parking Brake0 228.

3. Start the vehicle or turn theignition on.

4. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

5. Shift the transfer case to 2 m.6. Turn the transfer case knob

clockwise to N (Neutral) until itstops and hold it there until theN (Neutral) light starts blinking.This will take at least10 seconds. Then slowlyrelease the knob to the 4 nposition. The N (Neutral) light

will come on when the transfercase shift to N (Neutral) iscomplete.

7. With the engine running, verifythat the transfer case is inN (Neutral) by shifting thetransmission to R (Reverse),then shift the transmission toD (Drive). There should be nomovement of the vehicle whileshifting the transmission.

8. Turn the engine off, and theignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

9. Place the transmission shiftlever in P (Park). SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing0 355.


Shifting Out of N (Neutral)

To shift out of N (Neutral):

1. Set the parking brake andapply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition on with theengine off.

3. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).



4. Turn the transfer case knob tothe desired setting.

After the transfer case hasshifted out of N (Neutral), theN (Neutral) light will go out.

5. Release the parking brake.

6. Start the engine and shift thetransmission to thedesired gear.

Single Speed AutomaticTransfer Case

Use the transfer case knob, next tothe steering wheel, to shift into andout of four-wheel drive for extratraction.

All of the lights will blink on then offmomentarily when the ignition isturned on. The light that remains onwill indicate the state of thetransfer case.

If the indicator mark on the switchdoes not match up with the lightthen that likely means the switchwas moved when the ignitionwas off.

The indicator mark on the switchmust line up with the indicator lightbefore a shift can be commanded.To command a shift rotate thetransfer case switch to the newdesired position. The light will blinkmeaning that the shift is in progress.When the shift is completed the newposition will be illuminated. If thetransfer case can not complete ashift command, it will go back to itslast chosen setting.

The settings are:

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Usefor driving on most streets andhighways. The front axle is notengaged. This setting provides thebest fuel economy.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive) : Use when road surfacetraction conditions are variable.When driving in AUTO, the frontaxle is engaged, and the vehicle'spower is sent to the front and rearwheels automatically based ondriving conditions. This settingprovides slightly lower fuel economythan 2 m.Do not use AUTO mode to park ona steep grade with poor tractionsuch as ice, snow, mud, or gravel.In AUTO mode only rear wheels willhold the vehicle from sliding whenparked. If parking on a steep grade,use 4 m to keep all four wheelsengaged.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Usethis position when extra traction isneeded, such as when driving onsnowy or icy roads, whenoff-roading, or when plowing snow.



Shifting Into 4 m or AUTO

Turn the knob to the 4 m or AUTOposition. This can be done at anyspeed. The indicator light will flashwhile shifting. It will remain on whenthe shift is completed.

Shifting Into 2 m

Turn the knob to the 2 m position.This can be done at any speed. Theindicator light will flash whileshifting. It will remain on when theshift is completed.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has an Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemay be heard while this test is goingon, and it may even be noticed thatthe brake pedal moves a little. Thisis normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Light0 145.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses the wheels areslowing down. If one of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.



Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You may hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate. This isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

Set the parking brake by holding theregular brake pedal down, thenpushing down the parking brakepedal.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light0 145.

Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the parking brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, a DICmessage will appear and a chimewill sound warning you that theparking brake is still on.

Brake AssistThe Brake Assist feature isdesigned to assist the driver instopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brake



control module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates. TheBrake Assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)Vehicles with StabiliTrak have a HillStart Assist (HSA) feature, whichmay be useful when the vehicle isstopped on a grade. This feature isdesigned to prevent the vehicle fromrolling, either forward or rearward,during vehicle drive off. After thedriver completely stops and holds

the vehicle in a complete standstillon a grade, HSA will beautomatically activated. During thetransition period between when thedriver releases the brake pedal andstarts to accelerate to drive off on agrade, HSA holds the brakingpressure for a maximum oftwo seconds to ensure that there isno rolling. The brakes willautomatically release when theaccelerator pedal is applied withinthe two-second window. If thevehicle is equipped with theIntegrated Trailer Brake Control(ITBC) system, HSA may also applythe trailer brakes. It will not activateif the vehicle is in a drive gear andfacing downhill or if the vehicle isfacing uphill and in R (Reverse).There may be situations on minorhills (less than 5% grade) with aloaded vehicle or while pulling atrailer where HSA may activate.

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, anelectronic stability control system.These systems help limit wheel spinand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses that anyof the drive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tothe spinning wheels and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak activates when thevehicle senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak selectively appliesbraking pressure to any one of thevehicle wheel brakes to assist thedriver in keeping the vehicle on the



intended path. Trailer Sway Control(TSC) is also on automatically whenthe vehicle is started. See TrailerSway Control (TSC) 0 273.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak beginsto limit wheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when roadconditions allow.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 200and “Turning the Systems Off andOn” later in this section.

When the transfer case is inFour-Wheel Drive Low, the stabilitysystem is automatically disabled, g

comes on, and the appropriatemessage will appear on the DIC.Both traction control and StabiliTrakare automatically disabled in thiscondition.

The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:

. Flash when TCS is limitingwheel spin.

. Flash when StabiliTrak isactivated.

. Turn on and stay on when eithersystem is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC), andd comes on and stays on toindicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver in

maintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.


Drive the vehicle. If d comes onand stays on, the vehicle may needmore time to diagnose the problem.If the condition persists, see yourdealer.

Turning the Systems Offand On

The button for TCS and StabiliTrakis on the instrument panel to the leftof the steering wheel.



Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off only TCS, press andrelease g. The traction off light idisplays in the instrument cluster.The appropriate message willdisplay in the DIC. To turn TCS onagain, press and release g. Thetraction off light i displayed in theinstrument cluster will turn off.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin when gis pressed, the system will not turnoff until the wheels stop spinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold g until the traction

off light i and the StabiliTrak OFF

light g come on and stay on in theinstrument cluster, then release. Theappropriate message will display inthe DIC.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak onagain, press and release g. Thetraction off light i and the

StabiliTrak OFF light g in theinstrument cluster turn off.

StabiliTrak will automatically turn onif the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h(35 mph). Traction control willremain off.

The vehicle has a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature and a HillStart Assist (HSA) feature.See Trailer Sway Control (TSC)0 273 or Hill Start Assist (HSA)0 229.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 278.

Hill DescentControl (HDC)If equipped, Hill Descent Control(HDC) sets and maintains vehiclespeed while driving down steep

grades in a forward or reverse gear.The HDC switch is on the centerstack, below the climate controls.

Press 5 to enable or disable HDC.Vehicle speed must be below50 km/h (31 mph).

When enabled, the HDC lightdisplays on the instrument cluster.

A blinking HDC light indicates thesystem is actively applying thebrakes to maintain vehicle speed.HDC can maintain vehicle speedsbetween 1 and 30 km/h (1 and19 mph) on grades greater than orequal to 10%.

If HDC is to be used for more thanthree minutes or on grades steeperthan 25%, the transfer case shouldbe put into Four-Wheel Drive Low(4 n) to reduce the possibility ofbrake overheating.



Noise from the hydraulic brakecontrol module is normal when HDCis active.

When HDC is activated, the initialHDC speed is set to the currentdriving speed. It can be increased ordecreased by pressing +RES orSET- on the steering wheel, or byapplying the accelerator or brakepedal. This adjusted speedbecomes the new set speed.

HDC will remain enabled between30 and 60 km/h (19 and 37 mph);however, vehicle speed cannot beset or maintained in this range. HDCwill automatically disable if thevehicle speed is above 80 km/h(50 mph) or above 60 km/h(37 mph) for at least 30 seconds.

5 must be pressed again tore-enable HDC. HDC may disableafter an extended period of use.If this happens, HDC will requiretime to cool down. The length oftime HDC remains active dependson road conditions, grade, setspeed, vehicle loading, and outsidetemperature.

When enabled, if the vehicle speedis above 30 km/h (19 mph) andbelow 60 km/h (37 mph), a DICmessage will display.

Magnetic Ride ControlThis vehicle may have a semi-activedamping system called MagneticRide Control. With this feature,improved vehicle ride and handlingis provided under a variety ofpassenger and loading conditions.

Magnetic Ride Control is fullyautomatic and uses a computercontroller to continuously monitorvehicle speed, wheel to bodyposition, lift/dive, and steeringposition of the vehicle. Thecontroller then sends signals toeach shock absorber toindependently adjust the dampinglevel to provide the optimumvehicle ride.

Magnetic Ride Control also interactswith the Tow/Haul Mode that, whenactivated, will provide additionalcontrol of the shock absorbers. Thisadditional control results in betterride and handling characteristics

when the vehicle is loaded or towinga trailer. See “Tow/Haul Mode”under Towing Equipment 0 267.

Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud,ice, sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, butwhen traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.

Automatic Level ControlThe Automatic Level Control (ALC)rear suspension is available onlight-duty vehicles and comes as apart of the Magnetic Ride Controlsuspension, if equipped. ALC mayalso be available as a stand alonefeature.

This type of level control is fullyautomatic and will provide a betterleveled riding position as well asbetter handling under a variety ofpassenger and loading conditions.An air compressor connected to therear shocks will raise or lower therear of the vehicle to maintain



proper vehicle height. The system isactivated when the ignition key isturned on and will automaticallyadjust vehicle height thereafter. Thesystem may exhaust (lower vehicleheight) for up to 10 minutes after theignition key has been turned off.You may hear the air compressoroperating when the height is beingadjusted.

If a weight-distributing hitch is beingused, it is recommended to allowthe shocks to inflate, therebyleveling the vehicle prior to adjustingthe hitch.

Cruise Control

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not usecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

With cruise control a speed of about40 km/h (25 mph) or more can bemaintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol disengages.

For an explanation of how cruisecontrol interacts with the RangeSelection Mode, Tow/Haul Mode,

and Grade Braking systems. See“Grade Braking” underTow/HaulMode 0 222.

This vehicle has StabiliTrak andwhen the system begins to limitwheel spin, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 229. If a collision alertoccurs when cruise control isactivated, cruise control isdisengaged. See Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) System 0 246. Whenroad conditions allow the cruisecontrol to be safely used again, itcan be turned back on.



5 : Press to turn the system on oroff. A white indicator comes on inthe instrument cluster when thecruise is turned on.

SET− : Press briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease vehicle speed.

+RES : If there is a set speed inmemory, press to resume thatspeed or press and hold toaccelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If5 is on when not in use, SET− or+RES could get pressed and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise5 button off when cruise isnot being used.

1. Press5 to turn the cruisesystem on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET−. Thedesired set speed brieflyappears in the instrumentcluster.

4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.

The cruise control indicator on theinstrument cluster turns green aftercruise control has been set to thedesired speed. See InstrumentCluster 0 133.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesor* is applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,briefly press +RES. The vehiclereturns to the previous set speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold +RES until thevehicle accelerates to thedesired speed, then release it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly press+RES. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster 0 133.The increment value used dependson the units displayed.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold SET– until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.



. To slow down in smallincrements, briefly press SET–.For each press, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.


Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed. Whilepressing the accelerator pedal orshortly following the release tooverride cruise control, brieflypressing SET– will result in cruisecontrol set to the current vehiclespeed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends on the vehiclespeed, the load, and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steephills, pressing the accelerator pedal

may be necessary to maintainvehicle speed. When goingdownhill, Cruise Grade Brakinghelps maintain the driver selectedspeed.

Cruise Grade Braking is enabledwhen the vehicle is started andcruise control is active. It is notenabled in Range Selection Mode.It assists in maintaining driverselected speed when driving ondownhill grades by using the engineand transmission to slow thevehicle.

To disable and enable Cruise GradeBraking for the current ignition keycycle, press and hold the Tow/Haulbutton for five seconds. A DICmessage displays.

For other forms of Grade Braking,see Automatic Transmission 0 216and Tow/Haul Mode 0 222.

Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

. To turn off cruise control,press5.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if 5 is pressedor if the ignition is turned off.

Adaptive Cruise ControlIf equipped with Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC), it allows for selectingthe cruise control set speed andfollowing gap. Read this entiresection before using this system.ACC uses a camera and radarsensors to detect other vehicles.See Radio Frequency Statement0 396. The following gap is thefollowing time (or distance) betweenyour vehicle and a vehicle detecteddirectly ahead in your path, movingin the same direction. If no vehicleis detected in your path, ACC workslike regular cruise control.



If a vehicle is detected in your path,ACC can speed up the vehicle orapply limited, moderate braking tomaintain the selected following gap.To disengage ACC, apply the brake.If the Traction Control System (TCS)or electronic stability control systemactivates while ACC is engaged,ACC may automatically disengage.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 229. When roadconditions allow ACC to be safelyused, the ACC can be turnedback on.

ACC will not engage if the TCS orelectronic stability control system isdisabled.

{ Warning

ACC has limited braking abilityand may not have time to slowthe vehicle down enough to avoida collision with another vehicleyou are following. This can occurwhen vehicles suddenly slow orstop ahead, or enter your lane.Also see “Alerting the Driver” in

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

this section. Complete attention isalways required while driving andyou should be ready to takeaction and apply the brakes. SeeDefensive Driving 0 190.

{ Warning

ACC will not detect or brake forchildren, pedestrians, animals,or other objects.

Do not use ACC when:

. On winding and hilly roadsor when the sensors areblocked by snow, ice, or dirt.The system may not detecta vehicle ahead. Keep theentire front of the vehicleclean.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Visibility is low, such as infog, rain, or snowconditions. ACCperformance is limited underthese conditions.

. On slippery roads wherefast changes in tire tractioncan cause excessivewheel slip.



5 : Press to turn the system on oroff. The indicator turns white on theinstrument cluster when ACC isturned on.

+RES : Press briefly to resume theprevious set speed or hold toaccelerate. If ACC is alreadyengaged, use to increase vehiclespeed.

SET– : Press briefly to set thespeed and activate ACC. If cruisecontrol is already engaged, use todecrease vehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage ACCwithout erasing the selected setspeed.

3 : Press to select a following gaptime (or distance) setting for ACC ofFar, Medium, or Near.


Setting Adaptive Cruise Control

If J is on when not in use, it couldget pressed and go into ACC whennot desired. Keep J off whencruise is not being used.

Select the set speed desired forcruise. This is the vehicle speedwhen no vehicle is detected inits path.

ACC will not set or resume at aspeed less than 25 km/h (16 mph).

To set ACC:

1. Press5.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET– .

4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.

After ACC is set, it may immediatelyapply the brakes if a vehicle aheadis detected closer than the selectedfollowing gap.

The ACC indicator displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC) inthe instrument cluster and Head-Updisplay (HUD), if equipped. WhenACC is active, the indicator turnsgreen.

Be mindful of speed limits,surrounding traffic speeds, andweather conditions when selectingthe set speed.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the ACC is set at a desired speedand then the brakes are applied,ACC is disengaged without erasingthe set speed from memory.

To begin using ACC again, press+RES on the steering wheel. Thevehicle returns to the previous setspeed.



Increasing Speed While ACC is ata Set Speed

Do one of the following:

. Use the accelerator to get to thehigher speed. Press SET– .Release the control and theaccelerator pedal. The vehiclewill now cruise at the higherspeed.

When the accelerator pedal ispressed, ACC will not brakebecause it is overridden.A warning message will appearon the Driver Information Center(DIC) and HUD, if equipped. SeeVehicle Messages 0 157.

. Press and hold +RES until thedesired set speed appears onthe display, then release it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly press+RES. For each press, thevehicle goes to the next 1 km/h(1 mph) faster mark on thespeedometer.

. To increase speed in largerincrements, press and brieflyhold +RES. For each press, the

vehicle speed goes to next5 km/h (5 mph) faster mark onthe speedometer.

When it is determined that there isno vehicle ahead or the vehicleahead is beyond the selectedfollowing gap, then the vehiclespeed will increase to the set speed.

Reducing Speed While ACC is at aSet Speed

Do one of the following:

. Use the brake to get to thedesired lower speed. Releasethe brake and press SET– . Thevehicle will now cruise at thelower speed.

. Press and hold SET– until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly pressSET−. For each press, thevehicle speed goes to the next1 km/h (1 mph) slower mark onthe speedometer.

. To decrease speed in largerincrements, press and brieflyhold SET−. For each press, thevehicle speed goes to the next5 km/h (5 mph) slower mark onthe speedometer.

Selecting the Follow Distance Gap

When a slower moving vehicle isdetected ahead within the selectedfollowing gap, ACC will adjust thevehicle's speed and attempt tomaintain the follow distance gapselected.

Press3 on the steering wheel toadjust the following gap. Whenpressed, the current gap settingdisplays briefly on the instrumentcluster and HUD, if equipped.Subsequent presses cycle the3button through three settings: Far,Medium, or Near. The gap settingwill be maintained until it ischanged.

Since each gap setting correspondsto a following time (Far, Medium,or Near), the following distance willvary based on vehicle speed. Thefaster the vehicle speed, the further



back your vehicle will follow avehicle detected ahead. Considertraffic and weather conditions whenselecting the following gap. Therange of selectable gaps may not beappropriate for all drivers anddriving conditions.

Changing the gap settingautomatically changes the alerttiming sensitivity (Far, Medium,or Near) for the Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) feature. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System 0 246.

Alerting the Driver

Without Head-Up Display

With Head-Up Display

If ACC is engaged, driver actionmay be required when ACC cannotapply sufficient braking because ofapproaching a vehicle too rapidly.

When this condition occurs, six redlights or the collision alert symbol onthe HUD, if equipped, will flash onthe windshield, and either eightbeeps will sound from the front,or both sides of the Safety AlertSeat will pulse five times. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 158.

See Defensive Driving 0 190.

Approaching and Following aVehicle

The vehicle ahead indicator is in theinstrument cluster and HUD,if equipped.

The vehicle ahead indicator onlydisplays when a vehicle is detectedin your vehicle’s path moving in thesame direction.

If this indicator is not displaying,ACC will not respond to or brake tovehicles ahead.

ACC automatically slows the vehicledown and adjusts vehicle speed tofollow the vehicle in front at theselected follow gap. The vehiclespeed increases or decreases tofollow the vehicle in front of you, butwill not exceed the set speed. It mayapply limited braking, if necessary.When braking is active, the brakelights will come on. The automatic



braking may feel or sound differentthan if the brakes were appliedmanually. This is normal.

Stationary or Very Slow-MovingObjects

{ Warning

ACC may not detect and react tostopped or slow-moving vehiclesahead of you. For example, thesystem may not brake for avehicle it has never detectedmoving. This can occur instop-and-go traffic or when avehicle suddenly appears due toa vehicle ahead changing lanes.Your vehicle may not stop andcould cause a crash. Use cautionwhen using ACC. Your completeattention is always required whiledriving and you should be readyto take action and apply thebrakes.

ACC Automatically Disengages

ACC may automatically disengageand you will need to manually applythe brakes to slow the vehicle if:

. Your vehicle speed goes belowthe minimum speed of 16 km/h(10 mph).

. The sensors are blocked.

. The Traction Control System(TCS) or electronic stabilitycontrol system has activated orbeen disabled.

. There is a fault in the system.

. The radar falsely reports ablockage when driving in adesert or remote area with noother vehicles or roadsideobjects. A DIC message maydisplay to indicate that ACC istemporarily unavailable.

A message will appear on the DICindicating that cruise is disengaging.

The ACC indicator will turn whitewhen ACC is no longer active.

ACC Override

If using the accelerator pedal whileACC is active, a warning messagein the DIC and in the HUD,if equipped, will indicate thatautomatic braking will not occur.See Vehicle Messages 0 157. ACCwill resume operation when theaccelerator pedal is not beingpressed.

{ Warning

The ACC will not automaticallyapply the brakes if your foot isresting on the accelerator pedal.You could crash into a vehicleahead of you.

Curves in the Road

{ Warning

On curves, ACC may not detect avehicle ahead in your lane. Youcould be startled if the vehicleaccelerates up to the set speed,

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

especially when following avehicle exiting or entering exitramps. You could lose control ofthe vehicle or crash. Do not useACC while driving on an entranceor exit ramp. Always be ready touse the brakes if necessary.

{ Warning

On curves, ACC may respond toa vehicle in another lane, or maynot have time to react to a vehiclein your lane. You could crash intoa vehicle ahead of you, or losecontrol of your vehicle. Give extraattention in curves and be readyto use the brakes if necessary.Select an appropriate speed whiledriving in curves.

ACC may operate differently in asharp curve. It may reduce thevehicle speed if the curve is toosharp.

When following a vehicle andentering a curve, ACC may notdetect the vehicle ahead andaccelerate to the set speed. Whenthis happens, the vehicle aheadindicator will not appear.

ACC may detect a vehicle that isnot in your lane and apply thebrakes.

ACC may occasionally provide analert and/or braking that isconsidered unnecessary. It couldrespond to vehicles in differentlanes, signs, guardrails, and otherstationary objects when entering orexiting a curve. This is normaloperation. The vehicle does notneed service.

Other Vehicle Lane Changes

ACC will not detect a vehicle aheaduntil it is completely in the lane. Thebrakes may need to be manuallyapplied.



Do Not Use ACC on Hills andWhen Towing a Trailer

Do not use ACC when driving onsteep hills or when towing a trailer.ACC will not detect a vehicle in thelane while driving on steep hills. Thedriver will often need to take overacceleration and braking on steephills, especially when towing atrailer. If the brakes are applied, theACC disengages.

Disengaging ACC

There are three ways todisengage ACC:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Press5.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if 5 is pressedor if the ignition is turned off.

Cleaning the Sensing System

The radar sensor on the front of thevehicle can become blocked bysnow, ice, dirt, or mud. This areaneeds to be cleaned for ACC tooperate properly.

For cleaning instructions, see“Washing the Vehicle” underExterior Care 0 360.

System operation may also belimited under snow, heavy rain,or road spray conditions.

Driver AssistanceSystemsThis vehicle may have features thatwork together to help avoid crashesor reduce crash damage whiledriving, backing, and parking. Readthis entire section before usingthese systems.

{ Warning

Do not rely on the DriverAssistance Systems. Thesesystems do not replace the needfor paying attention and drivingsafely. You may not hear or feelalerts or warnings provided bythese systems. Failure to useproper care when driving mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage. See Defensive Driving0 190.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Under many conditions, thesesystems will not:

. Detect children,pedestrians, bicyclists,or animals.

. Detect vehicles or objectsoutside the area monitoredby the system.

. Work at all driving speeds.

. Warn you or provide youwith enough time to avoid acrash.

. Work under poor visibility orbad weather conditions.

. Work if the detection sensoris not cleaned or is coveredby ice, snow, mud, or dirt.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Work if the detection sensoris covered up, such as witha sticker, magnet, or metalplate.

. Work if the area surroundingthe detection sensor isdamaged or not properlyrepaired.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take actionand apply the brakes and/or steerthe vehicle to avoid crashes.

Audible or Safety Alert Seat

Some driver assistance featuresalert the driver of obstacles bybeeping. To change the volume ofthe warning chime, see “Comfortand Convenience” under VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

If equipped with the Safety AlertSeat, the driver seat cushion mayprovide a vibrating pulse alertinstead of beeping. To change this,

see “Collision/Detection Systems”under Vehicle Personalization0 158.

Assistance Systems forParking or BackingIf equipped, the Rear Vision Camera(RVC), Rear Parking Assist (RPA),Front Parking Assist (FPA), andRear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) mayhelp the driver park or avoid objects.Always check around the vehiclewhen parking or backing.

Rear Vision Camera (RVC)

When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse), the RVC displays animage of the area behind the vehiclein the infotainment display. Theprevious screen displays when thevehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse)after a short delay. To return to theprevious screen sooner, press anybutton on the infotainment system,shift into P (Park), or reach a vehiclespeed of approximately 12 km/h (8mph). The rear vision camera isabove the license plate.



1. View Displayed by theCamera

1. View Displayed by theCamera

2. Corners of the Rear Bumper

Displayed images may be farther orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objects thatare close to either corner of thebumper or under the bumper do notdisplay.

A warning triangle may display toshow that RPA has detected anobject. This triangle changes fromamber to red and increases in sizethe closer the object.

{ Warning

The camera(s) do not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or anyother object outside of thecameras’ field of view, below thebumper, or under the vehicle.Shown distances may be differentfrom actual distances. Do notdrive or park the vehicle usingonly these camera(s). Alwayscheck behind and around thevehicle before driving. Failure touse proper care may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.

Parking Assist

With RPA, and if equipped with FPA,as the vehicle moves at speeds ofless than 8 km/h (5 mph) thesensors on the bumpers may detectobjects up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind and1.2 m (4 ft) in front of the vehiclewithin a zone 25 cm (10 in) high offthe ground and below bumper level.These detection distances may beshorter during warmer or humidweather. Blocked sensors will notdetect objects and can also causefalse detections. Keep the sensorsclean of mud, dirt, snow, ice, andslush; and clean sensors after a carwash in freezing temperatures.

{ Warning

The Parking Assist system doesnot detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. It is not available atspeeds greater than 8 km/h(5 mph). To prevent injury, death,

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

or vehicle damage, even withParking Assist, always check thearea around the vehicle andcheck all mirrors before movingforward or backing.

The instrument cluster may have aparking assist display with bars thatshow “distance to object” and objectlocation information for RPA, and onsome vehicles, FPA. As the objectgets closer, more bars light up andthe bars change color from yellow toamber to red.

When an object is first detected inthe rear, one beep will be heardfrom the rear, or both sides of theSafety Alert Seat will pulse twotimes. When an object is very close(<0.6 m (2 ft) in the vehicle rear,or <0.3 m (1 ft) in the vehicle front),a continuous beep will sound fromthe front or rear depending onobject location, or both sides of theSafety Alert Seat will pulse fivetimes. Beeps for FPA are higherpitched than for RPA.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

If equipped, when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse), RCTAdisplays a red warning triangle witha left or right pointing arrow on theRVC screen to warn of trafficcoming from the left or right. Thissystem detects objects coming fromup to 20 m (65 ft) from the left orright side of the vehicle. When anobject is detected, either threebeeps sound from the left or right orthree Safety Alert Seat pulses occuron the left or right side, dependingon the direction of the detectedvehicle.

Use caution while backing up whentowing a trailer, as the RCTAdetection zones that extend outfrom the back of the vehicle do notmove further back when a trailer istowed.

Turning the Features On or Off

TheX button to the left of thesteering wheel is used to turn on oroff the Front and Rear ParkingAssist. The indicator light in thebutton comes on when the featuresare on and turns off when thefeatures have been disabled.

Front and Rear Parking Assist canbe turned off, on, or on with towbarthrough vehicle personalization. See“Parking Assist” under VehiclePersonalization 0 158. If the parkingassist is turned off through vehiclepersonalization, the parking assistbutton will be disabled. To turn the



parking assist on again, select On invehicle personalization. The On withTowbar setting allows for theparking assist to work properly withan attached trailer hitch. Turn offparking assist when towing a trailer.

To turn the rear parking assistsymbols, guidance lines, or RearCross Traffic Alert on or off, see“Rear Camera” and “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 158.

Assistance Systems forDrivingIf equipped, when driving thevehicle in a forward gear, ForwardCollision Alert (FCA), LaneDeparture Warning (LDW), LaneKeep Assist (LKA), Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA), Lane Change Alert(LCA), and/or Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB) can help to avoid acrash or reduce crash damage.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, the FCA system mayhelp to avoid or reduce the harmcaused by front-end crashes. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a red flashingalert on the windshield and rapidlybeeps or pulses the driver seat.FCA also lights an amber visualalert if following another vehiclemuch too closely.

FCA detects vehicles within adistance of approximately 60 m(197 ft) and operates at speedsabove 8 km/h (5 mph). If the vehiclehas Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),it can detect vehicles to distances ofapproximately 110 m (360 ft) andoperates at all speeds. SeeAdaptive Cruise Control 0 235.

{ Warning

FCA is a warning system anddoes not apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving or

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. It also may notprovide any warning at all. FCAdoes not warn of pedestrians,animals, signs, guardrails,bridges, construction barrels,or other objects. Be ready to takeaction and apply the brakes. SeeDefensive Driving 0 190.

FCA can be disabled with either theFCA steering wheel control or,if equipped, through vehiclepersonalization. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 158.



Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

FCA warnings will not occur unlessthe FCA system detects a vehicleahead. When a vehicle is detected,the vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay green. Vehicles may not bedetected on curves, highway exitramps, or hills, due to poor visibility;or if a vehicle ahead is partiallyblocked by pedestrians or otherobjects. FCA will not detect anothervehicle ahead until it is completelyin the driving lane.

{ Warning

FCA does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects a vehicle. FCA may notdetect a vehicle ahead if the FCAsensor is blocked by dirt, snow,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

or ice, or if the windshield isdamaged. It may also not detect avehicle on winding or hilly roads,or in conditions that can limitvisibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or inproper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.

Collision Alert

With Head-Up Display

Without Head-Up Display

When your vehicle approachesanother detected vehicle too rapidly,the red FCA display will flash on thewindshield. Also, eight rapidhigh-pitched beeps will sound fromthe front, or both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat will pulse five times.When this Collision Alert occurs, thebrake system may prepare for driverbraking to occur more rapidly whichcan cause a brief, mild deceleration.Continue to apply the brake pedalas needed. Cruise control may bedisengaged when the Collision Alertoccurs.



Tailgating Alert

The vehicle-ahead indicator willdisplay amber when you arefollowing a vehicle ahead much tooclosely.

Selecting the Alert Timing

The Collision Alert control is on thesteering wheel. Press[ /3 toset the FCA timing to Far, Medium,Near, or on some vehicles, Off. Thefirst button press shows the currentsetting on the DIC. Additional buttonpresses will change this setting. Thechosen setting will remain until it ischanged and will affect the timing ofboth the Collision Alert and theTailgating Alert features. The timingof both alerts will vary based onvehicle speed. The faster thevehicle speed, the farther away thealert will occur. Consider traffic andweather conditions when selecting

the alert timing. The range ofselectable alert timing may not beappropriate for all drivers anddriving conditions.

If your vehicle is equipped withAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC),changing the FCA timing settingautomatically changes the ACCfollowing gap setting (Far, Medium,or Near).

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessaryalerts for turning vehicles, vehiclesin other lanes, objects that are notvehicles, or shadows. These alertsare normal operation and thevehicle does not need service.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, this may correctthe issue:

. Clean the outside of thewindshield in front of therearview mirror.

. Clean the entire front of thevehicle.

. Clean the headlamps.

For cleaning instructions, see“Washing the Vehicle” underExterior Care 0 360.

System operation may also belimited under snow, heavy rain,or road spray conditions.

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB)If the vehicle has Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), it also has FAB, whichincludes Intelligent BrakeAssist (IBA). When the systemdetects a vehicle ahead in your paththat is traveling in the samedirection that you may be about tocrash into, it can provide a boost tobraking or automatically brake thevehicle. This can help avoid orlessen the severity of crashes whendriving in a forward gear. Dependingon the situation, the vehicle mayautomatically brake moderately orhard. This forward automaticbraking can only occur if a vehicle isdetected. This is shown by the FCAvehicle ahead indicator being lit.See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 246.



The system works when driving in aforward gear between 8 km/h(5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph),or on vehicles with Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC), above 4 km/h(2 mph). It can detect vehicles up toapproximately 60 m (197 ft).

{ Warning

FAB is an emergency crashpreparation feature and is notdesigned to avoid crashes. Donot rely on FAB to brake thevehicle. FAB will not brakeoutside of its operating speedrange and only responds todetected vehicles.

FAB may not:

. Detect a vehicle ahead onwinding or hilly roads.

. Detect all vehicles,especially vehicles with atrailer, tractors, muddyvehicles, etc.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Detect a vehicle whenweather limits visibility, suchas in fog, rain, or snow.

. Detect a vehicle ahead if itis partially blocked bypedestrians or other objects.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take actionand apply the brakes and/or steerthe vehicle to avoid crashes.

FAB may slow the vehicle to acomplete stop to try to avoid apotential crash. The vehicle will onlyhold at a stop briefly. A firm press ofthe accelerator pedal will alsorelease FAB.

{ Warning

FAB may automatically brake thevehicle suddenly in situationswhere it is unexpected and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

undesired. It could respond to aturning vehicle ahead, guardrails,signs, and other non-movingobjects. To override FAB, firmlypress the accelerator pedal, if it issafe to do so.

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

IBA may activate when the brakepedal is applied quickly by providinga boost to braking based on thespeed of approach and distance toa vehicle ahead.

Minor brake pedal pulsations orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the brake pedal shouldcontinue to be applied as needed.IBA will automatically disengageonly when the brake pedal isreleased.



{ Warning

IBA may increase vehicle brakingin situations when it may not benecessary. You could block theflow of traffic. If this occurs, takeyour foot off the brake pedal andthen apply the brakes as needed.

FAB and IBA can be disabledthrough vehicle personalization. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 158.

{ Warning

Using FAB or IBA while towing atrailer could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and crash.Turn the system to Alert, or if thevehicle has ACC to Off, whentowing a trailer.

A system unavailable message maydisplay if:

. The front of the vehicle orwindshield is not clean.

. Heavy rain or snow is interferingwith object detection.

. There is a problem with theStabiliTrak system.

The FAB system does not needservice.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, the SBZA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding crashes thatoccur with moving vehicles in theside blind zone (or spot) areas.When the vehicle is in a forwardgear, the left or right side mirrordisplay will light up if a movingvehicle is detected in that blindzone. If the turn signal is activatedand a vehicle is also detected onthe same side, the display will flashas an extra warning not to changelanes. Since this system is part ofthe Lane Change Alert (LCA)system, read the entire LCA sectionbefore using this feature.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)If equipped, the LCA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding lane changecrashes that occur with movingvehicles in the side blind zone (orspot) areas or with vehicles rapidlyapproaching these areas frombehind. The LCA warning displaywill light up in the correspondingoutside side mirror and will flash ifthe turn signal is on.

{ Warning

LCA does not alert the driver tovehicles outside of the systemdetection zones, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals. It may notprovide alerts when changinglanes under all driving conditions.Failure to use proper care whenchanging lanes may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.Before making a lane change,always check mirrors, glance overyour shoulder, and use the turnsignals.



LCA Detection Zones

1. SBZA Detection Zone2. LCA Detection Zone

The LCA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m(11 ft). The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. TheSide Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)warning area starts at approximatelythe middle of the vehicle and goesback 5 m (16 ft). Drivers are alsowarned of vehicles rapidlyapproaching from up to 70 m (230 ft)behind the vehicle.

How the System Works

The LCA symbol lights up in theside mirrors when the systemdetects a moving vehicle in the nextlane over that is in the side blindzone or rapidly approaching thatzone from behind. A lit LCA symbolindicates it may be unsafe tochange lanes. Before making a lanechange, check the LCA display,check mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use the turn signals.

Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror LCA displays willbriefly come on to indicate thesystem is operating. When thevehicle is in a forward gear, the leftor right side mirror display will lightup if a moving vehicle is detected inthe next lane over in that blind zoneor rapidly approaching that zone.

If the turn signal is activated in thesame direction as a detectedvehicle, this display will flash as anextra warning not to change lanes.

LCA can be disabled throughvehicle personalization using theSide Blind Zone Alert option. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 158.If LCA is disabled by the driver, theLCA mirror displays will not light up.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The LCA system requires somedriving for the system to calibrate tomaximum performance. Thiscalibration may occur more quickly ifthe vehicle is driving on a straighthighway road with traffic androadside objects (e.g., guardrails,barriers).

LCA displays may not come onwhen passing a vehicle quickly, fora stopped vehicle, or when towing atrailer. The LCA detection zonesthat extend back from the side ofthe vehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing a



trailer. LCA may alert to objectsattached to the vehicle, such as atrailer, bicycle, or object extendingout to either side of the vehicle.Attached objects may also interferewith the detection of vehicles. Thisis normal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.

LCA may not always alert the driverto vehicles in the next lane over,especially in wet conditions or whendriving on sharp curves. The systemdoes not need to be serviced. Thesystem may light up due toguardrails, signs, trees, shrubs, andother non-moving objects. This isnormal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.

LCA may not operate when the LCAsensors in the left or right corners ofthe rear bumper are covered withmud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or inheavy rainstorms. For cleaninginstructions, see "Washing theVehicle" under Exterior Care 0 360.If the DIC still displays the systemunavailable message after cleaningboth sides of the vehicle toward therear corners of the vehicle, see yourdealer.

If the LCA displays do not light upwhen moving vehicles are in theside blind zone or are rapidlyapproaching this zone and thesystem is clean, the system mayneed service. Take the vehicle toyour dealer.

When LCA is disabled for anyreason other than the driver turningit off, the Side Blind Zone Alert Onoption will not be available on thepersonalization menu.

Radio Frequency Information

See Radio Frequency Statement0 396.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may provide awarning if the vehicle is crossing adetected lane marking without usinga turn signal in the lane departuredirection. Since this system is partof the Lane Keep Assist (LKA)system, read the entire LKA sectionbefore using this feature.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)If equipped, LKA may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel if thevehicle approaches a detected lanemarking without using a turn signalin that direction. It may also providea Lane Departure Warning (LDW)system alert as the lane marking iscrossed. The LKA system will notassist or provide an LDW alert if itdetects that you are activelysteering. Override LKA by turningthe steering wheel. LKA uses acamera to detect lane markingsbetween 60 km/h (37 mph) and180 km/h (112 mph).

{ Warning

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle.It may not keep the vehicle in thelane or give a Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) alert, even if alane marking is detected.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

The LKA and LDW systemsmay not:

. Provide an alert or enoughsteering assist to avoid alane departure or crash.

. Detect lane markings underpoor weather or visibilityconditions. This can occur ifthe windshield orheadlamps are blocked bydirt, snow, or ice, if they arenot in proper condition, or ifthe sun shines directly intothe camera.

. Detect road edges.

. Detect lanes on winding orhilly roads.

If LKA only detects lane markingson one side of the road, it willonly assist or provide an LDWalert when approaching the laneon the side where it has detecteda lane marking. Even with LKAand LDW, you must steer the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle. Always keep yourattention on the road andmaintain proper vehicle positionwithin the lane, or vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Always keep thewindshield, headlamps, andcamera sensors clean and ingood repair. Do not use LKA inbad weather conditions.

{ Warning

Using LKA while towing a traileror on slippery roads could causeloss of control of the vehicle anda crash. Turn the system off.

How the System Works

The LKA camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.

To turn LKA on and off, pressAto the left of the steering wheel.

When on,A is green if LKA isavailable to assist and provide LDWalerts. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel anddisplayA as amber if the vehicleapproaches a detected lane markingwithout using a turn signal in thatdirection. It may also provide anLDW alert by flashingA amberas the lane marking is crossed.Additionally, there may be threebeeps, or the driver seat may pulsethree times, on the right or left,depending on the lane departuredirection.

Take Steering

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle.If LKA does not detect active driversteering, an alert, chime, or DICmessage may be provided. Steerthe vehicle to dismiss.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The system performance may beaffected by:

. Close vehicles ahead.



. Sudden lighting changes, suchas when driving through tunnels.

. Banked roads.

. Roads with poor lane markings,such as two-lane roads.

If the LKA system is not functioningproperly when lane markings areclearly visible, cleaning thewindshield may help.

A system unavailable message maydisplay if the camera is blocked.The LKA system does not needservice.

LKA assistance and/or LDW alertsmay occur due to tar marks,shadows, cracks in the road,temporary or construction lanemarkings, or other roadimperfections. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice. Turn LKA off if theseconditions continue.

FuelGM recommends the use of TOPTIER® detergent gasoline to keepthe engine cleaner and reduceengine deposits. Seewww.toptiergas.com for a list of TOPTIER detergent gasoline marketersand applicable countries.

If the vehicle has a yellow sticker onthe fuel door, E85 or FlexFuel canbe used. See E85 or FlexFuel0 256.

For the L83 5.3L V8 engine, useregular unleaded gasoline meetingASTM specification D4814 with aposted octane rating of 87 or higher.

Do not use gasoline with a postedoctane rating of less than 87, as thismay cause engine knock and willlower fuel economy.

For the L86 6.2L V8 engine,premium unleaded gasoline meetingASTM specification D4814 with aposted octane rating of 93 is highlyrecommended for best performanceand fuel economy. Unleadedgasoline with an octane rated as lowas 87 can be used. Using unleadedgasoline rated below 93 octane,however, will lead to reducedacceleration and fuel economy.If knocking occurs, use a gasolinerated at 93 octane as soon aspossible, otherwise, the enginecould be damaged. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline with a 93 octane rating, theengine needs service.



Prohibited Fuels

Caution

Do not use fuels with any of thefollowing conditions; doing somay damage the vehicle and voidits warranty:

. For vehicles which are notFlexFuel, fuel labeledgreater than 15% ethanol byvolume, such as mid-levelethanol blends (16 – 50%ethanol), E85, or FlexFuel.

. Fuel with any amount ofmethanol, methylal, andaniline. These fuels cancorrode metal fuel systemparts or damage plastic andrubber parts.

. Fuel containing metals suchas methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl(MMT), which can damagethe emissions controlsystem and spark plugs.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Fuel with a posted octanerating of less than therecommended fuel. Usingthis fuel will lower fueleconomy and performance,and may decrease the life ofthe emissions catalyst.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance may beaffected. The malfunction indicatorlamp could turn on and the vehiclemay not pass a smog-check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) 0 143. If this

occurs, return to your authorizeddealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition iscaused by the type of fuel used,repairs may not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesThe U.S., Canada, and Mexico postfuel octane ratings in anti-knockindex (AKI). For fuel not to use in aforeign country, see “ProhibitedFuels” in Fuel 0 254.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOPTIER detergent gasoline isrecommended. See Fuel 0 254.

If TOP TIER detergent gasoline isnot available, one bottle of GM FuelSystem Treatment Cleaner added tothe fuel tank at every engine oilchange, can help. GM Fuel SystemTreatment Cleaner is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.



If your vehicle is able to use E85 orFlexFuel, GM Fuel SystemTreatment Cleaner - FlexFuel is theonly recommended additive for use.Do not use any other additives withan E85 or FlexFuel vehicle. SeeE85 or FlexFuel 0 256.

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles marked as “E85” orFlexFuel can use either unleadedgasoline or ethanol fuel containingup to 85% ethanol (E85). All othervehicles should use only theunleaded gasoline as described inFuel 0 254.

The use of E85 or FlexFuel isencouraged when the vehicle isdesigned to use it. E85 or FlexFuelis made from renewable sources.

Many fuel stations will not have an85% ethanol fuel (E85) pumpavailable. Those stations that dohave E85 should have a labelindicating the FlexFuel ethanolcontent. Do not use the fuel if theethanol content is greater than 85%.

The starting characteristics of E85or FlexFuel make it unsuitable foruse when temperatures fall below−18 °C (0 °F). Use gasoline or addgasoline to the E85 or FlexFuel.

Because E85 or FlexFuel has lessenergy per liter (gallon) thangasoline, the vehicle will need to berefilled more often. See Filling theTank 0 256.

Caution

Some additives are notcompatible with E85 or FlexFueland can harm the vehicle's fuelsystem. Do not add anything toE85 or FlexFuel. Damage causedby additives would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and also

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

damage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on thefuel pump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Do not use a cell phonewhile refueling.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away fromthe fuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Fuel can spray out if therefueling nozzle is insertedtoo quickly. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hotweather. Insert the refuelingnozzle slowly and wait forany hiss noise to stop priorto beginning to flow fuel.

To open the fuel door, push andrelease the rearward center edge ofthe door.

The vehicle has a capless refuelingsystem and does not have a fuelcap. The filling nozzle must be fullyinserted and latched prior to startingfuel flow.

{ Warning

Overfilling the fuel tank by morethan three clicks of a standard fillnozzle may cause:

. Vehicle performance issues,including engine stalling anddamage to the fuel system.

. Fuel spills.

. Potential fuel fires.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care 0 360.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.



Filling the Tank with a PortableGas Can

If the vehicle runs out of fuel andmust be filled from a portablegas can:

1. Locate the capless funneladapter from inside the vehicle.

2. Insert and latch the funnel intothe capless fuel system.

{ Warning

Attempting to refuel without usingthe funnel adapter may cause fuelspillage and damage the caplessfuel system. This could cause afire and you or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged.

3. Remove and clean the funneladapter and return to thestorage location.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside thefill opening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

keep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, lightmatches, or use lighterswhile pumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.



Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer. Readthe entire section before towing atrailer.

For towing a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle 0 355. Fortowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing 0 355.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:

. Become familiar with the stateand local laws that apply totrailer towing. Theserequirements vary from state tostate.

. The trailer must be equippedwith brakes adequate for theintended use. A loaded trailerweighing more than 900 kg(2,000 lb) must be equipped withits own brake system, withbrakes working on all axles.Trailer braking equipmentconforming to CanadianStandards Association (CSA)requirement CAN3-D313, or itsequivalent, is recommended.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500 mi) to preventdamage to the engine, axle,or other parts.

. Then during the first 800 km(500 mi) of trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shiftstoo often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

. Do not use Adaptive CruiseControl when towing.

. Turn off Parking Assist and RearCross Traffic Alert (RTCA) whentowing.

. The Forward Automatic BrakingSystem should be set to Offwhen towing. See ForwardAutomatic Braking (FAB) 0 21.

. Turn off Lane Keep Assist (LKA)when towing. See Lane KeepAssist (LKA) 0 252.

{ Warning

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

When towing a trailer:

. Do not drive with theliftgate, trunk/hatch,or rear-most window open.


(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Also adjust the climatecontrol system to a settingthat brings in only outsideair. See “Climate ControlSystems” in the Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust 0 215.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.

The structure, tires, and brakes ofthe trailer must be rated to carry theload. Inadequate trailer equipmentcan cause the combination tooperate in an unexpected or unsafemanner.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires, and mirrors. Get familiar with

the handling and braking of the rig.If the trailer has electric brakes, startthe combination moving and thenapply the trailer brake controller byhand to be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid heavybraking and sudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Thecombination will not accelerate asquickly and is longer so it isnecessary to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle beforereturning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand to

the left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Caution

Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer tocome in contact with the vehicle.The vehicle could be damaged.Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this sothe trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,or other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

If the trailer turn signal bulbs burnout, the arrows on the instrumentcluster will still flash for turns. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.



Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might get hot and no longerwork well.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too oftenunder heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.

When towing, use the Tow/HaulMode to prevent damage to theengine or transmission. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 222.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil ata lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with thetransmission in P (Park) for a few

minutes before turning the engineoff. If the overheat warning comeson, see Engine Overheating 0 294.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into traffic iffacing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the regularbrakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake andshift into P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brakepedal.


3. Shift into a gear.


5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pickup and store the chocks.

Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 370.Things that are especially importantin trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system, and



brake system. It is a good idea toinspect these before and duringthe trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Trailer TowingDo not tow a trailer during break-in.See New Vehicle Break-In 0 204.

Before towing a trailer, see"Hands-Free Operation" underLiftgate 0 43.

{ Warning

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is too heavyor the trailer brakes areinadequate for the load, thevehicle may not stop as expected.The driver and passengers couldbe seriously injured. The vehiclemay also be damaged; theresulting repairs would not be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

covered by the vehicle warranty.Pull a trailer only if all the steps inthis section have been followed.Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

Caution

Pulling a trailer improperly candamage the vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in thissection and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the information in“Weight of the Trailer” following.

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. So please readthis section carefully before pulling atrailer.



Weight of the Trailer

Safe trailering requires monitoringthe weight, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature, andhow frequently the vehicle is used topull a trailer. Take into considerationany special equipment on thevehicle, and the amount of tongueweight the vehicle can carry. See“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” laterin this section for more information.

Trailer Weight Rating (TWR) iscalculated assuming the tow vehiclehas only the driver and all requiredtrailering equipment. Weight ofadditional optional equipment,passengers, and cargo in the towvehicle must be subtracted from thetrailer weight rating.

Use the following chart to determinehow much the trailer can weigh,based upon the vehicle model andoptions.



Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

Yukon Denali 2WD 3.23 3 810 kg (8,400 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Yukon Denali AWD 3.23 3 674 kg (8,100 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Yukon XL Denali 2WD 3.23 3 674 kg (8,100 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Yukon XL Denali AWD 3.23 3 583 kg (7,900 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.


Yukon 2WD 3.42 3 856 kg (8,500 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Yukon AWD 3.42 3 719 kg (8,200 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Yukon XL 2WD 3.42 3 765 kg (8,300 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Yukon XL AWD 3.42 3 629 kg (8,000 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)





Yukon 2WD 3.08 2 948kg (6,500 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)

Yukon AWD 3.08 2 858 kg (6,300 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)

Yukon XL 2WD 3.08 2 858kg (6,300 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)

Yukon XL AWD 3.08 2 671 kg (6,000 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)


Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (1) of any trailer isvery important because it is alsopart of the vehicle weight. TheGross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo carried in it, andthe people who will be riding in thevehicle as well as trailer tongueweight. Vehicle options, equipment,passengers, and cargo in thevehicle reduce the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry,

which will also reduce the trailerweight the vehicle can tow. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 200 for moreinformation about the vehicle'smaximum load capacity.

In general, trailer tongue weight (1)should be 10-15 % of the loadedtrailer weight (2). Some specifictrailer types (especially boat trailers)



fall outside of this range. In thiscase, the recommended tongueweight in the trailer owner’s manualshould be observed. In all cases,the maximum loads for the vehicleseries and hitch type should not beexceeded.

Vehicle Series Hitch TypeMaximum Tongue

Weight

1500 Weight Carrying 272 kg (600 lb)

1500 Weight Distributing 453 kg (1,000 lb)

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitchball closest to the vehicle. This willhelp reduce the effect of trailertongue weight on the rear axle.

Trailer rating may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). See “Total Weighton the Vehicle's Tires” following.

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

If a cargo carrier is used in thetrailer hitch receiver, choose acarrier that positions the load asclose to the vehicle as possible.Make sure the total weight,including the carrier, is no more thanhalf of the maximum allowabletongue weight for the vehicle or 227kg (500 lb), whichever is less.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the inflation pressuresfound on the Certification label onthe center pillar or see Vehicle LoadLimits 0 200. Make sure not toexceed the GVWR limit for thevehicle, or the RGAWR, with the towvehicle and trailer fully loaded forthe trip including the weight of thetrailer tongue. If using aweight-distributing hitch, make sure



not to exceed the RGAWR beforeapplying the weight distributionspring bars.

Weight of the TraileringCombination

It is important that the combinationof the tow vehicle and trailer doesnot exceed any of its weightratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Trailer Weight Rating, or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the tow vehicle andtrailer combination, fully loaded forthe trip, getting individual weightsfor each of these items.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

The correct hitch equipment helpsmaintain combination control. Mostsmall-to-medium trailers can betowed with a weight-carrying hitchwhich simply features a couplerlatched to the hitch ball. Largertrailers may require aweight-distributing hitch that usesspring bars to distribute the trailer

tongue weight among the twovehicle and trailer axles. See“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” inTrailer Towing 0 262 for rating limitswith various hitch types.

Consider using sway controls withany trailer. Ask a traileringprofessional about sway controls orrefer to the trailer manufacturer'srecommendations and instructions.

Weight-Distributing HitchAdjustment

1. Front of Vehicle2. Body to Ground Distance

When using a weight-distributinghitch, measure distance (2) beforecoupling the trailer to the hitch ball.Measure the height again after thetrailer is coupled and adjust thespring bars so the distance (2) is asclose as possible to halfwaybetween the two measurements.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chainsmay be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. If the trailer beingtowed weighs up to 2 271 kg(5,000 lb) with a factory-installedstep bumper, safety chains may beattached to the attaching points onthe bumper, otherwise, safetychains should be attached to holeson the trailer hitch platform. Alwaysleave just enough slack so thecombination can turn. Never allowsafety chains to drag on the ground.



Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 900 kg (2,000 lb) must beequipped with its own brake system,with brakes working on all axles.Trailer braking equipmentconforming to Canadian StandardsAssociation (CSA) requirementCAN3-D313, or its equivalent, isrecommended.

State and local regulations may alsorequire the trailer to have its ownbraking system if loaded above acertain threshold. Theserequirements vary from state tostate.

Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for the trailer brakes sothey are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly. Theserequirements vary from state tostate.

Do not tap into the vehicle'shydraulic brake system.

Since the vehicle is equipped withStabiliTrak, the trailer brakes cannottap into the vehicle's hydraulicsystem.

Trailer Wiring Harness

The seven-pin trailer connector ismounted in the bumper. Thisconnector can be plugged into aseven-pin universal heavy-dutytrailer connector available throughyour dealer.

Use only a round, seven-wireconnector with flat blade terminalsmeeting SAE J2863 specificationsfor proper electrical connectivity.

The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:

. Yellow/Grey: Left Stop/TurnSignal

. Green/Violet: Right Stop/TurnSignal

. Grey/Brown: Taillamps

. White: Ground

. White/Green: Back-up Lamps

. Red/Green: Battery Feed

. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake

To help charge a remote(non-vehicle) battery, press the Tow/Haul Mode button at the end of theshift lever. If the trailer is too light for

Tow/Haul Mode, turn on theheadlamps to help charge thebattery.

Electric Brake Control WiringProvisions

These wiring provisions areincluded with the vehicle as part ofthe trailer wiring package. Theseprovisions are for an electric brakecontroller.

The harness should be installed byyour dealer or a qualified servicecenter.

Tow/Haul Mode



Pressing this button at the end ofthe shift lever turns on and off theTow/Haul Mode.

This indicator light on the instrumentcluster comes on when the Tow/Haul Mode is on.

Tow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load. See Tow/HaulMode 0 222.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75% of the vehicle's GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See “Weight of the Trailer” underTrailer Towing 0 262. Tow/Haul ismost useful under the followingdriving conditions:

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load throughrolling terrain.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load instop-and-go traffic.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with no trailerat all will not cause damage.However, there is no benefit to theselection of Tow/Haul when thevehicle is unloaded. Such aselection when unloaded may resultin unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristicsand reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul is recommended only whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load.

Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System

The vehicle may have an IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) systemfor use with electric trailer brakes ormost electric-over-hydraulic trailerbrakes.

This symbol is on the Trailer BrakeControl Panel on vehicles with anITBC system. The power output tothe trailer brakes is based on theamount of brake pressure beingapplied by the vehicle’s brakesystem, and on the type of trailerbrakes detected. This availablepower output to the trailer brakescan be adjusted to a wide range oftrailering situations.

The ITBC system is integrated withthe vehicle’s brake, antilock brake,and StabiliTrak systems. In traileringconditions that cause the vehicle’s



antilock brake or StabiliTraksystems to activate, power sent tothe trailer's brakes will beautomatically adjusted to minimizetrailer wheel lock-up. This does notimply that the trailer has StabiliTrak.

If the vehicle’s brake, antilock brake,or StabiliTrak systems are notfunctioning properly, the ITBCsystem may not be fully functionalor may not function at all. Make sureall of these systems are fullyoperational to ensure fullfunctionality of the ITBC system.

The ITBC system is poweredthrough the vehicle's electricalsystem. Turning the ignition off willalso turn off the ITBC system. TheITBC system is fully functional onlywhen the ignition is in on.

{ Warning

Connecting a trailer that has anair brake system may result inreduced or complete loss of trailerbraking. There may be anincrease in stopping distance or

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

trailer instability which couldresult in personal injury ordamage to the vehicle, trailer,or other property. Use the ITBCsystem only with electric orelectric over hydraulic trailerbrakes.

Trailer Brake Control Panel

1. Manual Trailer Brake ApplyLever

2. Trailer Gain AdjustmentButtons

The ITBC system has a controlpanel on the instrument panel to theleft of the steering column. Thecontrol panel allows adjustment tothe amount of output, referred to asTrailer Gain, available to the trailerbrakes and allows manualapplication of the trailer brakes. TheTrailer Brake Control Panel is usedalong with the Trailer Brake DisplayPage on the DIC to adjust anddisplay power output to the trailerbrakes.

Trailer Brake DIC Display Page

The ITBC system displaysmessages in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

The display page indicates TrailerGain setting, power output to thetrailer brakes, trailer connection, andsystem operational status.

To display the Trailer Brake DisplayPage do any of the following:

. Scroll through the DIC menupages.

. Press a Trailer Gain button.If the Trailer Brake Display Pageis not currently displayed, press



a Trailer Gain button to recall thecurrent Trailer Gain setting.Each press and release of thegain buttons will then change theTrailer Gain setting.

. Activate the Manual TrailerBrake apply lever.

TRAILER GAIN: This setting can beadjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with eithera trailer connected or disconnected.To adjust the Trailer Gain, press oneof the Trailer Gain adjustmentbuttons. Press and hold a gainbutton to continuously adjust theTrailer Gain. To turn the output tothe trailer off, adjust the Trailer Gainsetting to 0.0 (zero).

TRAILER OUTPUT: Displays anytime a trailer with electric brakes isconnected. Output to the trailerbrakes is based on the amount ofvehicle braking present and relativeto the Trailer Gain setting. Output isdisplayed from 0 to 100% for eachgain setting.

The Trailer Output will indicate “- - -- - -” on the Trailer Brake DisplayPage whenever the following occur:

. No trailer is connected.

. A trailer without electric brakesis connected (no DIC messagedisplayed).

. A trailer with electric brakes hasbecome disconnected (aCHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage will also display onthe DIC).

. There is a fault present in thewiring to the trailer brakes (aCHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage will also display onthe DIC).

. The ITBC system is not workingdue to a fault (a SERVICETRAILER BRAKE SYSTEMmessage will also display inthe DIC).

Manual Trailer Brake Apply

The Manual Trailer Brake Applylever is used to apply the trailer’selectric brakes independent of thevehicle’s brakes. Sliding the lever to

the left will apply only the trailerbrakes. Use this lever to adjustTrailer Gain to properly adjust thepower output to the trailer brakes.

The trailer's and the vehicle's brakelamps will come on when eithervehicle brakes or manual trailerbrakes are applied.

Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure

Trailer Gain should be set for aspecific trailering condition and mustbe adjusted any time vehicleloading, trailer loading, or roadsurface conditions change.

{ Warning

Trailer brakes that areover-gained or under-gained maynot stop the vehicle and the traileras intended and can result in acrash. Always follow theinstructions to set the Trailer Gainfor the proper trailer stoppingperformance.



To adjust Trailer Gain for eachtowing condition:

1. Drive the vehicle with the trailerattached on a level roadsurface representative of thetowing condition and free oftraffic at about 32 to 40 km/h(20 to 25 mph) and fully applythe Manual Trailer Brake applylever.

Adjusting Trailer Gain atspeeds lower than 32 to40 km/h (20 to 25 mph) mayresult in an incorrect gainsetting.

2. Adjust the Trailer Gain, usingthe Trailer Gain adjustmentbuttons, to just below the pointof trailer wheel lock-up,indicated by trailer wheelsqueal or tire smoke when atrailer wheel locks.

Trailer wheel lock-up may notoccur if towing a heavily loadedtrailer. In this case, adjust theTrailer Gain to the highestallowable setting for the towingcondition.

3. Readjust Trailer Gain any timevehicle loading, trailer loading,or road surface conditionschange or if trailer wheellock-up is noticed at any timewhile towing.

Other ITBC-Related DIC Messages

In addition to displaying TRAILERGAIN and OUTPUT through theDIC, trailer connection and ITBCsystem status are displayed onthe DIC.

TRAILER CONNECTED: Thismessage will briefly display when atrailer with electric brakes is firstconnected to the vehicle. Thismessage will automatically turn offin about 10 seconds. This messagecan be acknowledged before itautomatically turns off.

CHECK TRAILER WIRING: Thismessage will display if:

. The ITBC system firstdetermines connection to atrailer with electric brakes andthen the trailer harness becomesdisconnected from the vehicle.

If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is stationary, thismessage will automatically turnoff in about 30 seconds. Thismessage will also turn off if it isacknowledged or if the trailerharness is reconnected.

If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is moving, thismessage will continue until theignition is turned off. Thismessage will also turn off if it isacknowledged or if the trailerharness is reconnected.

. There is an electrical fault in thewiring to the trailer brakes. Thismessage will continue as longas there is an electrical fault inthe trailer wiring. This messagewill also turn off if it isacknowledged.

To determine if the electrical fault ison the vehicle side or trailer side ofthe trailer wiring harnessconnection:

1. Disconnect the trailer wiringharness from the vehicle.




3. Wait 10 seconds, then turn theignition back to RUN.

4. If the CHECK TRAILERWIRING message reappears,the electrical fault is on thevehicle side.

If the CHECK TRAILERWIRING message onlyreappears when connecting thetrailer wiring harness to thevehicle, the electrical fault is onthe trailer side.

SERVICE TRAILER BRAKESYSTEM: This message will displaywhen there is a problem with theITBC system. If this messagecontinues over multiple ignitioncycles, there is a problem with theITBC system. Have the vehicleserviced.

If either the CHECK TRAILERWIRING or SERVICE TRAILERBRAKE SYSTEM message displayswhile driving, the ITBC system maynot be fully functional or may notfunction at all. When trafficconditions allow, carefully pull thevehicle over to the side of the roadand turn the ignition off. Check the

wiring connection to the trailer andturn the ignition back on. If either ofthese messages continues, eitherthe vehicle or trailer needs service.

A GM dealer may be able todiagnose and repair problems withthe trailer. However, any diagnosisand repair of the trailer is notcovered under the vehicle warranty.Contact your trailer dealer forassistance with trailer repairs andtrailer warranty information.

Trailer SwayControl (TSC)The vehicle has a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature as part of theStabiliTrak system. If TSC detectsthat the trailer is swaying, thevehicle's brakes are automaticallyapplied.

When TSC is applying the brakes,the TCS/StabiliTrak indicator lightflashes to notify the driver to reducespeed. If the trailer continues tosway, StabiliTrak will reduce enginetorque to help slow the vehicle.

TSC will not function if StabiliTrak isturned off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 229.

Electronic Trailer Sway ControlDevices

Some trailers may come equippedwith an electronic device designedto reduce or control trailer sway.Aftermarket equipmentmanufacturers also offer similardevices that connect to the wiringbetween the trailer and the vehicle.These devices may interfere withthe vehicle’s trailer brake or othersystems, including integratedanti-sway systems, if equipped.Messages related to trailerconnections or trailer brakes couldappear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The effect that thesedevices may have on vehiclehandling or trailer brakeperformance is unknown.



{ Warning

Use of electronic trailer swaycontrol devices could result inreduced trailer brakeperformance, loss of trailerbrakes, or other malfunctions, andcould cause a crash. You orothers could be injured or killed.Before using one of thesedevices:

. Ask the device or trailermanufacturer if the devicehas been thoroughly testedfor compatibility with themake, model, and year ofthe vehicle as well asoptional equipment installedon the vehicle.

. Before driving on the openroads, check that the trailerbrakes are working properly.Drive the vehicle with thetrailer attached on a levelroad surface that is free oftraffic at about 32-40 km/h(20-25 mph) and fully apply

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the manual trailer brakeapply lever. Also check thatthe trailer brake lamps andother lamps are functioningcorrectly.

. If the trailer brakes are notoperating properly at anytime, or if a DIC messageindicates problems with thetrailer connections or trailerbrakes, carefully pull thevehicle over to the side ofthe road when trafficconditions allow.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Warning

The Data Link Connector (DLC) isused for vehicle service andEmission Inspection/Maintenance testing. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) 0 143.A device connected to the DLC —such as an aftermarket fleet ordriver-behavior tracking device —may interfere with vehiclesystems. This could affect vehicleoperation and cause a crash.Such devices may also accessinformation stored in the vehicle’ssystems.



Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always checkwith your dealer before addingelectrical equipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle 0 95 and Adding Equipmentto the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle0 95.


276 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 277California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . . 278

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 285Automatic Transmission Fluid(6 Speed Transmission) . . . . . 286

Automatic Transmission Fluid(8 and 10 SpeedTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . 290Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . 294Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Battery - North America . . . . . . 298Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 301Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 302Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 303

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 303Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 304Windshield Replacement . . . . . 304Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 306High Intensity Discharge (HID)Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 308

Electrical SystemElectrical System Overload . . . 309Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 309Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Instrument Panel Fuse Block(Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . 322Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334


Vehicle Care 277

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 339Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 350

Jump StartingJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 355Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 Warning

{ Warning

Most motor vehicles, includingthis one, as well as many of itsservice parts and fluids, containand/or emit chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts andsystems, many fluids, and somecomponent wear by-productscontain and/or emit thesechemicals. For more informationgo to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See Battery - North America 0 298and Jump Starting - North America0 351 and the back cover.


278 Vehicle Care

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to suspension componentscaused by modifying vehicle heightoutside of factory settings will not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non-GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 95.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner’s manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information0 395.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 95.


Vehicle Care 279

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records 0 382.

Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is inside the vehicleunder the steering wheel.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle tofind the secondary hoodrelease. The handle is underthe front edge of the hood nearthe center. Push the handle tothe right and at the same timeraise the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly. Thenbring the hood from full open towithin 15 cm (6 in) from the closedposition, pause, and push the frontcenter of the hood with a swift, firmmotion to fully close the hood.


280 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

5.3L V8 Engine


Vehicle Care 281

1. Positive (+) Terminal. SeeJump Starting - North America0 351.

2. Battery - North America 0 298.

3. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem 0 291.

4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 290.

5. Automatic TransmissionDipstick. See “How to CheckAutomatic Transmission Fluid”under Automatic TransmissionFluid (6 Speed Transmission)0 286 or AutomaticTransmission Fluid (8 and 10Speed Transmission) 0 289.

6. Remote Negative (–) Location(Out of View). See JumpStarting - North America 0 351.

7. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System0 291.

8. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 283.

9. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 283.

10. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid0 296.

11. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrake Fluid 0 297.

12. Engine Compartment FuseBlock 0 310.


282 Vehicle Care

6.2L V8 Engine


Vehicle Care 283

1. Positive (+) Terminal. SeeJump Starting - North America0 351.

2. Battery - North America 0 298.

3. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem 0 291.

4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 290.

5. Remote Negative (–) Location(Out of View). See JumpStarting - North America 0 351.

6. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System0 291.

7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 283.

8. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 283.

9. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid0 296.

10. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrake Fluid 0 297.

11. Engine Compartment FuseBlock 0 310.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:

. Use engine oil approved to theproper specification and of theproper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System 0 285.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

If equipped, the ENGINE OIL LOWADD OIL message displays whenthe engine oil level may be too low.Check the oil level before filling tothe recommended level. If the oil isnot low and this message remainson, see your dealer.

Check the engine oil level regularly,every 650 km (400 mi), especiallyprior to a long trip. The engine oildipstick handle is a loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 280 for the location.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

Follow these guidelines:

. To get an accurate reading, parkthe vehicle on level ground.Check the engine oil level afterthe engine has been off for atleast two hours. Checking the


284 Vehicle Care

engine oil level on steep gradesor too soon after engine shutoffcan result in incorrect readings.Accuracy improves whenchecking a cold engine prior tostarting. Remove the dipstickand check the level.

. If unable to wait two hours, theengine must be off for at least15 minutes if the engine iswarm, or at least 30 minutes ifthe engine is not warm. Pull outthe dipstick, wipe it with a cleanpaper towel or cloth, then push itback in all the way. Remove itagain, keeping the tip down, andcheck the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick andthe engine has been off for at least15 minutes, add 1 L (1 qt) of therecommended oil and then recheckthe level. See “Selecting the RightEngine Oil” later in this section foran explanation of what kind of oil touse. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications 0 384.

Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit driving

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

of the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 280 for the location of the engineoil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 379.

Specification

Ask for and use engine oils thatmeet the dexos1 specification.


Vehicle Care 285

Engine oils that have beenapproved by GM as meeting thedexos1 specification are markedwith the dexos1 approved logo. Seewww.gmdexos.com.

Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 0W-20 viscosity gradeengine oil.

When selecting an oil of theappropriate viscosity grade, it isrecommended to select an oil of thecorrect specification. See“Specification” earlier in this section.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting thedexos1 specification are all that isneeded for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in the

trash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, aCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes on to indicate thatan oil change is necessary. Changethe oil as soon as possible withinthe next 1 000 km (600mi). It ispossible that, if driving under thebest conditions, the oil life systemmay indicate that an oil change is


286 Vehicle Care

not necessary for up to a year. Theengine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and,at this time, the system must bereset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. Always reset theengine oil life to 100% after every oilchange. It will not reset itself. Toreset the engine oil life system:

1. Display the REMAINING OILLIFE on the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 151.

2. Press and hold V. The oil lifewill change to 100%.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Display the REMAINING OILLIFE on the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 151.

2. Fully press the acceleratorpedal slowly three times withinfive seconds.

3. Display the REMAINING OILLIFE on the DIC. If the displayshows 100%, the system isreset.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started and/or theREMAINING OIL LIFE is near 0%,the engine oil life system has notbeen reset. Repeat the procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid (6 SpeedTransmission)

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheatedtransmission. If a small leak issuspected, then use the followingchecking procedures to check thefluid level. However, if there is alarge leak, then it may be necessaryto have the vehicle towed to adealer service department and haveit repaired before driving the vehiclefurther.

Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damage maynot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use the

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 287

Caution (Continued)

automatic transmission fluid listedin Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 379.

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule0 370. Be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 379.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Caution

Too much or too little fluid candamage the transmission. Toomuch can mean that some of thefluid could come out and fall onhot engine parts or exhaustsystem parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

transmission to overheat. Be sureto get an accurate reading ifchecking the transmission fluid.

Before checking the fluid level,prepare the vehicle:

1. Start the engine and park thevehicle on a level surface.Keep the engine running.

2. Apply the parking brake andplace the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With your foot on the brakepedal, move the shift leverthrough each gear range,pausing for aboutthree seconds in each range.Then, move the shift lever backto P (Park).

4. Allow the engine to idle (500–800 rpm) for at leastone minute. Slowly release thebrake pedal.

5. Keep the engine running andcheck the transmission fluidtemperature on the Driver

Information Center (DIC). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 151.

6. Using the transmission fluidtemperature reading, determineand perform the appropriatecheck procedure. If thetransmission fluid temperaturereading is not within therequired temperature ranges,allow the vehicle to cool,or operate the vehicle until theappropriate transmission fluidtemperature is reached.

Cold Check Procedure

Use this procedure only as areference to determine if thetransmission has enough fluid to beoperated safely until a hot checkprocedure can be made. The hotcheck procedure is the mostaccurate method to check the fluidlevel. Perform the hot checkprocedure at the first opportunity.Use this cold check procedure tocheck fluid level when thetransmission temperature isbetween 27 °C and 32 °C (80 °F and90 °F).


288 Vehicle Care

1. Locate the transmissiondipstick at the rear of theengine compartment, on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview 0 280.

2. Flip the handle up, then pull outthe dipstick and wipe it with aclean rag or paper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushing itback in all the way; waitthree seconds, and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of thedipstick and read the lowerlevel. Repeat the checkprocedure to verify the reading.

5. If the fluid level is below theCOLD check band, add onlyenough fluid as necessary tobring the level into the COLDband. It does not take muchfluid, generally less than 0.5 L(1 pt). Do not overfill.

6. Perform a hot check at the firstopportunity after thetransmission reaches a normaloperating temperature between71 °C to 93 °C (160 °F to200 °F).

7. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way,then flip the handle down tolock the dipstick in place.

Hot Check Procedure

Use this procedure to check thetransmission fluid level when thetransmission fluid temperature isbetween 71 °C and 93 °C (160 °Fand 200 °F).

The hot check is the most accuratemethod to check the fluid level. Thehot check should be performed atthe first opportunity in order to verifythe cold check. The fluid level risesas fluid temperature increases, so itis important to ensure thetransmission temperature is withinrange.

1. Locate the transmissiondipstick at the rear of theengine compartment, on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview 0 280.


Vehicle Care 289

2. Flip the handle up, then pull outthe dipstick and wipe it with aclean rag or paper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushing itback in all the way; waitthree seconds, and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of thedipstick and read the lowerlevel. Repeat the checkprocedure to verify the reading.

5. Safe operating level is withinthe HOT cross hatch band onthe dipstick. If the fluid level isnot within the HOT band, andthe transmission temperature isbetween 71 °C and 93 °C(160 °F and 200 °F), add ordrain fluid as necessary tobring the level into the HOTband. If the fluid level is low,add only enough fluid to bring

the level into the HOT band.It does not take much fluid,generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt).Do not overfill.

6. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way,then flip the handle down tolock the dipstick in place.

Consistency of Readings

Always check the fluid level at leasttwice using the procedure describedpreviously. Consistency (repeatablereadings) is important to maintainingproper fluid level. If readings are stillinconsistent, contact the dealer.

Automatic TransmissionFluid (8 and 10 SpeedTransmission)

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheatedtransmission. This vehicle is not

equipped with a transmission fluidlevel dipstick. There is a specialprocedure for checking andchanging the transmission fluid inthese vehicles. Because thisprocedure is difficult, this should bedone at the dealer. Contact thedealer for additional information orthe procedure can be found in theservice manual. See ServicePublications Ordering Information0 395.

Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damage maynot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use theautomatic transmission fluid listedin Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 379.


290 Vehicle Care

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule0 370. Be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 379.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overview0 280 for the location of the engineair cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

For intervals on changing andinspecting the engine air cleaner/filter, see Maintenance Schedule0 370.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Do not start the engine or have theengine running with the engine aircleaner/filter housing open. Beforeremoving the engine air cleaner/filter, make sure that the engine aircleaner/filter housing and nearbycomponents are free of dirt anddebris. Remove the engine air

cleaner/filter. Lightly tap and shakethe engine air cleaner/filter (awayfrom the vehicle), to release loosedust and dirt. Inspect the engine aircleaner/filter for damage, andreplace if damaged. Do not cleanthe engine air cleaner/filter orcomponents with water orcompressed air.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Screws (4)2. Electrical Connector3. Air Duct Clamp

1. Locate the air cleaner/filterassembly. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 280.

2. Disconnect the outlet duct byloosening the air ductclamp (3).

3. Disconnect the electricalconnector (2) and theconnector harness from thecover.

4. Remove the four screws (1) ontop of the cover of the housingand lift up the cover.

5. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Takecare to dislodge as little dirt aspossible.

6. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and thehousing.

7. Inspect or replace the engineair cleaner/filter.

8. Reverse Steps 2-4 to reinstallthe filter cover housing.


Vehicle Care 291

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

1. Coolant Surge Tank2. Coolant Surge Tank

Pressure Cap3. Engine Electric

Cooling Fan(s)

{ Warning

An underhood electric fan canstart up even when the engine isnot running and can cause injury.Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhoodelectric fan.

{ Warning

Do not touch heater or radiatorhoses, or other engine parts.They can be very hot and canburn you. Do not run the engine ifthere is a leak; all coolant couldleak out. That could cause anengine fire and can burn you. Fixany leak before driving thevehicle.

Engine Coolant

The cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating 0 294.


292 Vehicle Care

What to Use

{ Warning

Plain water, or other liquids suchas alcohol, can boil before theproper coolant mixture will. Withplain water or the wrong mixture,the engine could get too hot butthere would not be an overheatwarning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. This mixture:

. Gives freezing protection downto −37 °C (−34 °F), outsidetemperature

. Gives boiling protection up to129 °C (265 °F), enginetemperature

. Protects against rust andcorrosion

. Will not damage aluminum parts

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature

Caution

Do not use anything other than amix of DEX-COOL coolant thatmeets GM StandardGMW3420 and clean, drinkablewater. Anything else can causedamage to the engine coolingsystem and the vehicle, whichwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, or by pouringit on the ground, or into sewers,streams, or bodies of water. Havethe coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiarwith legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank is in theengine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 280.

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, wait until it cools down. Thecoolant level should be at or above


Vehicle Care 293

the full cold mark. If it is not, theremay be a leak in the coolingsystem.

If coolant is visible but the coolantlevel is not at or above the full coldmark, see “How to Add Coolant tothe Coolant Surge Tank,” following.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

{ Warning

Spilling coolant on hot engineparts can burn you. Coolantcontains ethylene glycol and it willburn if the engine parts are hotenough.

{ Warning

Plain water, or other liquids suchas alcohol, can boil before theproper coolant mixture will. Withplain water or the wrong mixture,the engine could get too hot butthere would not be an overheat

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

warning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system are underpressure. Turning the pressurecap, even a little, can cause themto come out at high speed andyou could be burned. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andpressure cap to cool.

Caution

Failure to follow the specificcoolant fill procedure could causethe engine to overheat and could

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

cause system damage. If coolantis not visible in the surge tank,contact your dealer.

If no coolant is visible in the surgetank, add coolant.

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one fullturn. If a hiss is heard, wait forthat to stop. A hiss meansthere is still some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly, and remove it.


294 Vehicle Care

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the fullcold mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theengine coolant temperaturegauge indicates approximately90 °C (195 °F).

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surgetank until the level reaches thefull cold mark.

5. Replace the pressure captightly.

6. Verify coolant level after theengine is shut off and thecoolant is cold. If necessary,repeat coolant fill procedureSteps 1–6.

Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and enginedamage may occur. Be sure thecap is properly and tightlysecured.

Engine Overheating

Caution

Do not run the engine if there is aleak in the engine cooling system.This can cause a loss of allcoolant and can damage thesystem and vehicle. Have anyleaks fixed right away.

The vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is a coolant temperaturegauge in the vehicle's instrumentcluster. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge 0 138.

In addition, there are ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE, and ENGINE POWER ISREDUCED messages in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away. SeeRoadside Assistance Program0 390.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Check to see if the engine coolingfan(s) are running. If the engine isoverheating, the fans should berunning. If they are not, do notcontinue to run the engine. Have thevehicle serviced.


Vehicle Care 295

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system are underpressure. Turning the pressurecap, even a little, can cause themto come out at high speed andyou could be burned. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andpressure cap to cool.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage, along with a low coolantcondition, can indicate a seriousproblem.

If there is an engine overheatwarning, but no steam is seen orheard, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine canget a little too hot when the vehicle:

. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

. Stops after high-speed driving.

. Idles for long periods in traffic.

. Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing0 262.

If the ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage appears with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to thehighest temperature and to thehighest fan speed. Open thewindows as necessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

If the engine coolant temperaturegauge is no longer in the overheatzone or an overheat warning no

longer displays, the vehicle can bedriven. Continue to drive the vehicleslowly for about 10 minutes. Keep asafe vehicle distance from thevehicle in front. If the warning doesnot come back on, continue to drivenormally and have the coolingsystem checked for proper fill andfunction.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam andthe vehicle is equipped with anengine driven cooling fan, pushdown the accelerator until theengine speed is about twice as fastas normal idle speed for at leastfive minutes while the vehicle isparked. If the warning is still there,turn off the engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it cools down.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for five minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.


296 Vehicle Care

Engine FanIf the vehicle has electric coolingfans, the fans may be heardspinning at low speed during mosteveryday driving. The fans may turnoff if no cooling is required. Underheavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,high outside temperatures,or operation of the air conditioningsystem, the fans may change tohigh speed and an increase in fannoise may be heard. This is normaland indicates that the coolingsystem is functioning properly. Thefans will change to low speed whenadditional cooling is no longerrequired.

The electric engine cooling fansmay run after the engine has beenturned. off. This is normal and noservice is required.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid needsto be added, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. Use a fluid that has sufficient

protection against freezing in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

The vehicle has a low washer fluidmessage on the DIC that comes onwhen the washer fluid is low. Themessage is displayed for15 seconds at the start of eachignition cycle. When the WASHERFLUID LOW ADD FLUID messagedisplays, washer fluid will need tobe added to the windshield washerfluid reservoir.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 280 forreservoir location.

Caution

. Do not use washer fluid thatcontains any type of waterrepellent coating. This cancause the wiper blades tochatter or skip.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in thewindshield washer. It candamage the windshieldwasher system and paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause thesolution to freeze anddamage the washer fluidtank and other parts of thewasher system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters full whenit is very cold. This allowsfor fluid expansion if

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 297

Caution (Continued)

freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

BrakesDisc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or canbe heard all the time when thevehicle is moving, except whenapplying the brake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 384.

Brake pads should be replaced ascomplete sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service may be required.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacementparts. If this is not done, the brakesmay not work properly. The brakingperformance expected can changein many other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts areinstalled or if parts are improperlyinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with GM approved DOT 3brake fluid as indicated on thereservoir cap. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 280 forthe location of the reservoir.


298 Vehicle Care

Checking Brake Fluid

With the vehicle in P (Park) on alevel surface, the brake fluid levelshould be between the minimumand maximum marks on the brakefluid reservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoir maygo down:

. Normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are installed, thefluid level goes back up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system. Have thebrake hydraulic system fixed.With a leak, the brakes will notwork well.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake hydraulic system.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight 0 145.

Brake fluid absorbs water over timewhich degrades the effectiveness ofthe brake fluid. Replace brake fluidat the specified intervals to preventincreased stopping distance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 370.

What to Add

Use only GM approved DOT 3brake fluid from a clean, sealedcontainer. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 379.

{ Warning

The wrong or contaminated brakefluid could result in damage to thebrake system. This could result inthe loss of braking leading to apossible injury. Always use theproper GM approved brake fluid.

Caution

If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces, thepaint finish can be damaged.Immediately wash off any paintedsurface.

Battery - North AmericaThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not removethe cap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 280 for battery location.


Vehicle Care 299

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTERHANDLING. For more informationgo to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See California Proposition65 Warning 0 277 and the backcover.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you are

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

not careful. See Jump Starting -North America 0 351 for tips onworking around a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Four-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule0 370 to determine when to checkthe lubricant.

How to Check Lubricant

Automatic Transfer Case

1. Fill Plug2. Drain Plug

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug (1) hole, located on thetransfer case, some lubricant willneed to be added. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the fill plug (1) hole. Usecare not to overtighten the plug.


300 Vehicle Care

When to Change Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule0 370 to determine how often tochange the lubricant.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 379 to determine whatkind of lubricant to use.

Front AxleWhen to Check and ChangeLubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck front axle fluid unless a leakis suspected, or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.



1. Fill Plug2. Drain Plug

. When the differential is cold, addenough lubricant to raise thelevel from 0 mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm(1/8 in) below the fillplug (1) hole.

. When the differential is atoperating temperature (warm),add enough lubricant to raise thelevel to the bottom of the fillplug (1) hole.

What to Use


Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck rear axle fluid unless a leak issuspected or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.

All axle assemblies are filled byvolume of fluid during production.They are not filled to reach a certainlevel. When checking the fluid levelon any axle, variations in thereadings can be caused by factoryfill differences between the minimumand the maximum fluid volume.Also, if a vehicle has just beendriven before checking the fluidlevel, it may appear lower thannormal because fluid has traveledout along the axle tubes and hasnot drained back to the sump area.Therefore, a reading takenfive minutes after the vehicle hasbeen driven will appear to have alower fluid level than a vehicle thathas been stationary for an hour or


Vehicle Care 301

two. The rear axle assembly mustbe supported on a flat, level surfaceto get a true reading.



The proper level is 1.0 mm to19.0 mm (0.04 in to 0.7 in) belowthe bottom of the fill hole, located onthe rear axle. Add only enough fluidto reach the proper level.

What to Use


Noise Control SystemNoise Emission Warranty

General Motors warrants to the firstperson who purchases this vehiclefor purposes other than resale andto each subsequent purchaser thatthis vehicle as manufactured byGeneral Motors was designed, builtand equipped to conform at the timeit left General Motors control with allapplicable U.S. EPA Noise ControlRegulations. This warranty coversthis vehicle as designed, built andequipped by General Motors and isnot limited to any particular part,component or system of the vehiclemanufactured by General Motors.Defects in design, assembly or anypart, component or system of thevehicle manufactured by GeneralMotors, which at the time it leftGeneral Motors control caused

noise emissions to exceed Federalstandards, are covered by thewarranty for the life of the vehicle.

The following information relates tocompliance with federal noiseemission standards for vehicles witha Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg(10,000 lbs). The MaintenanceSchedule provides information onmaintaining the noise control systemto minimize degradation of the noiseemission control system during thelife of the vehicle. The noise controlsystem warranty is given in thevehicle warranty booklet.

These standards apply only tovehicles sold in the United States.

Federal law prohibits the followingacts or the causing thereof:

1. The removal or renderinginoperative by any person,other than for purposes ofmaintenance, repair orreplacement, of any device orelement of design incorporatedinto any new vehicle for thepurpose of noise control, prior


302 Vehicle Care

to its sale or delivery to theultimate purchaser or while it isin use; or

2. The use of the vehicle aftersuch device or element ofdesign has been removed orrendered inoperative by anyperson.

Among those acts presumed toconstitute tampering are the actslisted below.

Insulation:

Removal of the noise shields or anyunderhood insulation.

Engine:

Removal or rendering engine speedgovernor, if the vehicle has one,inoperative so as to allow enginespeed to exceed manufacturerspecifications.

Fan and Drive:

. Removal of fan clutch, if thevehicle has one, or renderingclutch inoperative.

. Removal of the fan shroud, if thevehicle has one.

Air Intake:

. Removal of the air cleanersilencer.

. Modification of the air cleaner.

Exhaust:

. Removal of the muffler and/orresonator.

. Removal of the exhaust pipesand exhaust pipe clamps.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.


Vehicle Care 303

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckIf equipped with a Key Accessignition, while parked and with theparking brake set, try to turn theignition off in each shift leverposition.

. The ignition should turn off onlywhen the shift lever is inP (Park).

. The key should come out onlywhen the ignition is off.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.

. To check the parking brake'sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking.

For the proper type and size, seeMaintenance Replacement Parts0 380.

Front Wiper BladeReplacement

To replace the wiper bladeassembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.


304 Vehicle Care

2. Lift up on the latch in themiddle of the wiper bladewhere the wiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down toward thewindshield far enough torelease it from the J-hookedend of the wiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

Allowing the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would notbe covered by the vehicle

warranty. Do not allow thewiper blade arm to touch thewindshield.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

To replace the rear wiper blade:

1. With the rear wiper in the offposition, open the liftglass toaccess the rear wiper arm/blade.

The rear wiper blade will notlock in a vertical position socare should be used whenpulling it away from the vehicle.

2. Push the release lever (2) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (1) out of theblade assembly (3).

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely in the wiper arm hookuntil the release lever clicksinto place.

4. Return the wiper arm andblade assembly to the restposition on the glass.

Glass ReplacementIf the windshield or front side glassmust be replaced, see your dealerto determine the correctreplacement glass.

Windshield Replacement

HUD System

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. If the windshield must bereplaced, get one that is designedfor HUD or the HUD image maylook out of focus.


Vehicle Care 305

Driver Assistance Systems

When a windshield replacement isneeded and the vehicle is equippedwith a front-looking camera sensorfor the Driver Assistance Systems,the windshield must be installedaccording to GM specifications forthese systems to work properly. If itis not, there may be unexpectedbehavior and/or messages fromthese systems.

Gas Strut(s)This vehicle is equipped with gasstrut(s) to provide assistance inlifting and holding open the hood/trunk/liftgate system in full openposition.

{ Warning

If the gas struts that hold openthe hood, trunk, and/or liftgate fail,you or others could be seriouslyinjured. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service immediately.Visually inspect the gas struts for

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

signs of wear, cracks, or otherdamage periodically. Check tomake sure the hood/trunk/liftgateis held open with enough force.If struts are failing to hold thehood/trunk/liftgate, do notoperate. Have the vehicleserviced.

Caution

Do not apply tape or hang anyobjects from gas struts. Also donot push down or pull on gasstruts. This may cause damage tothe vehicle.

See Maintenance Schedule 0 370.

Hood

Trunk


306 Vehicle Care

Liftgate

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, or any bulb changingprocedure not listed in this section,contact your dealer.

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting

{ Warning

The High Intensity Discharge(HID) lighting system operates ata very high voltage. If you try toservice any of the systemcomponents, you could beseriously injured. Have yourdealer or a qualified technicianservice them.

After an HID headlamp bulb hasbeen replaced, the beam might be aslightly different shade than it wasoriginally. This is normal.


Vehicle Care 307

LED LightingThis vehicle has several LED lamps.For replacement of any LED lightingassembly, contact your dealer.

Fog Lamps

To replace the front fog lamp bulb:

1. Locate the fog lamp under thefront bumper.

2. Disconnect the electricalconnector from the fog lampbulb assembly by pressing theconnector release.

3. Turn the bulb counterclockwiseto remove it from the housing.

Back-Up LampsTo replace a back-up bulb:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate0 43.

2. Remove the taillamp closeoutcover from the lamp assemblyby pulling rearward from thetop and bottom at the sametime to unfasten the snap tabs.

3. Remove the two screws fromthe taillamp assembly.

4. Pull the taillamp assemblystraight back to remove.


308 Vehicle Care

5. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the taillamp assembly.

6. Pull the bulb straight out fromthe socket.

7. Put a new bulb into the socket,insert it into the taillampassembly, and turn the bulbsocket clockwise until it clicks.

8. Reinstall the taillamp assemblyand tighten the screws.

9. Reinstall the taillamp cover bysnapping it into place.

License Plate Lamp

Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar

1. Bulb Socket

2. Bulb3. Lamp Assembly

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push the lamp assembly (3)toward the center of thevehicle.

2. Pull the lamp assembly downto remove.

3. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (3).

4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out ofthe bulb socket (1).

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socketand turn the bulb socketclockwise to install it into thelamp assembly.

6. Push the lamp assembly backinto position until the releasetab locks into place.


Vehicle Care 309

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses to protectagainst an electrical systemoverload. Fuses also protect powerdevices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thereare some spare fuses and a fusepuller in the left instrument panelfuse block. The same amperagefuse can also be borrowed. Choosesome feature of the vehicle that isnot needed to use and replace it assoon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

{ Danger

Fuses and circuit breakers aremarked with their ampere rating.Do not exceed thespecified amperage rating whenreplacing fuses and circuitbreakers. Use of an oversizedfuse or circuit breaker can resultin a vehicle fire. You and otherscould be seriously injured orkilled.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon aspossible.


310 Vehicle Care

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse blockis in the engine compartment, onthe driver side of the vehicle.

Lift the cover to access the fuseblock.

Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.

A fuse puller is available in the leftinstrument panel fuse block.


Vehicle Care 311

Fuses Usage

1 Electric runningboards

Fuses Usage

2 Antilock brakesystem pump

Fuses Usage

3 Interior BEC LT1


312 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

4 Passengermotorized seat belt

5 Suspensionlevelingcompressor

6 4WD transfer caseelectronic control

7 –

8 –

10 Electric parkingbrake/–

11 –

12 –

13 Interior BEC LT2

14 Rear BEC 1

15 –

16 –

17 Driver motorizedseat belt

18 –

19 –

20 –

Fuses Usage

21 Automaticheadlamp leveling/Exhaust solenoid

22 Fuel pump

23 Integrated chassiscontrol module

24 Real timedampening

25 Fuel pump powermodule

26 –/Battery regulatedvoltage control

27 –

28 Upfitter 2

30 Wiper

31 Trailer interfacemodule

32 –

33 –

34 Reverse lamps

35 Antilock brakesystem valve

36 Trailer brakes

Fuses Usage

38 –

39 Right trailerstoplamp/Turnsignal lamp

40 Left trailerstoplamp/turnsignal lamp

41 Trailer parkinglamps

42 Right parkinglamps

43 Left parking lamps

44 Upfitter 3

45 Automatic levelcontrol/Run/Crank

46 –

47 Upfitter 4

49 Reverse lamps

50 –

52 –

53 –

54 –


Vehicle Care 313

Fuses Usage

55 –

56 –

57 –

58 –

59 Euro trailer

60 Air conditioningcontrol

61 –

62 –

63 Upfitter 1

64 –

65 –

66 –

67 Trailer battery

68 Secondaryfuel pump

69 RC upfitter 3 and 4

70 VBATupfitter 3 and 4

71 –

73 –

Fuses Usage

74 Engine controlmodule/Ignition

75 Miscellaneous/Ignition/–

76 Transmission/Ignition

77 RC upfitter 1 and 2

78 VBATupfitter 1 and 2

79 –

80 –

81 –

82 –

83 Euro trailer/RC

85 –

86 –

87 Engine

88 Injector A – odd

89 Injector B – even

90 O2 sensor B

91 Throttle control

Fuses Usage

93 Horn

94 Fog lamps

95 High-beamheadlamps

96 –

97 –

98 –

99 –

100 O2 sensor A

101 Engine controlmodule

102 Engine controlmodule/Transmissioncontrol module

103 Auxiliary interiorheater

104 Starter

105 –

106 –

107 Aeroshutter

108 –


314 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

109 Police upfitter

110 –

111 –

113 –

114 Front windshieldwasher

115 Rear windowwasher

116 Left cooling fan

117 Fuel pump prime

118 –

119 –

120 Fuel pump prime

121 Right HIDheadlamp

122 Left HID headlamp

123 Right cooling fan

Relays Usage

9 Fuel pump

29 Upfitter 2

Relays Usage

37 Upfitter 3

48 Upfitter 4

51 Parking lamp

64 Secondaryfuel pump

72 Upfitter 1

84 Run/Crank

92 Engine controlmodule

112 Starter

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Left)

The left instrument panel fuse blockaccess door is on the driver sideedge of the instrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.


Vehicle Care 315

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1 –

2 –

Fuses Usage

3 –

4 Accessory poweroutlet 1

5 Retained accessorypower

6 APO/BATT

7 Universal garage dooropener/Interiorrearview mirror

8 SEO/Retainedaccessory power

9 –

10 Body control module 3


12 Steering wheel controlbacklighting

13 –

14 –

15 –

16 Discrete logic ignitionsensor

17 Video processingmodule


316 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

18 Mirror window module


20 Front bolster (ifequipped)

21 –

22 –

23 –

24 HVAC/Ignition

25 Instrument cluster/Ignition sensingdiagnostic module/Ignition

26 Tilt column/SEO/Tiltcolumn lock 1/SEO

27 Data link connector/Driver seat module

28 Passive entry/Passivestart/HVAC battery

29 Content theftdeterrent

30 –

31 –

32 –

Fuses Usage

33 SEO/Automatic levelcontrol/Leftheated seat

34 Park enable/Electricadjustable pedal (ifequipped)

35 –

36 Miscellaneous/Runcrank

37 Heated steering wheel

38 Steering columnlock 2 (if equipped)

39 Instrument clusterbattery

40 –

41 –

42 Euro trailer (ifequipped)

43 Left doors

44 Driver power seat

45 –

Fuses Usage

46 Right heated, cooled,or ventilated seat (ifequipped)

47 Left heated, cooled,or ventilated seat (ifequipped)

48 –

49 –


51 –

52 Retained accessorypower relay

54 –

55 –

56 –

Relays Usage


53 Run/Crank relay


Vehicle Care 317

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Right)

The right instrument panel fuseblock access door is on thepassenger side edge of theinstrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1 –

2 –


318 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

3 –


5 –

6 –

7 –

8 Glove box

9 –

10 –

11 –

12 Steering wheelcontrols


14 –

15 –

16 –

17 –

18 –


20 Rear seatentertainment

Fuses Usage

21 Sunroof

22 –

23 –

24 –

25 –

26 Infotainment/Airbag

27 –/RF window switch/Rain sensor

28 Obstacledetection/USB

29 Radio

30 –

31 –

32 –

33 –

34 –

35 –

36 Special equipmentoption B2

37 Special equipmentoption

Fuses Usage


39 Air conditioninginverter

40 –

41 –

42 –

43 –

44 Right door windowmotor

45 Front blower



48 Amplifier

49 Right front seat


51 –

53 –

54 –

55 –

56 –


Vehicle Care 319

Relays Usage


Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block isbehind the access panel on the leftside of the compartment.

Pull the panel out by grabbing thefinger access slot at the rear edge. The vehicle may not be equipped

with all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1 Rear windowdefogger relay

2 –

3 Right heated secondrow seat

4 Heated mirrors

5 Liftgate

6 Glass breakage

7 Liftglass

8 Liftgate module logic

9 Rear wiper

10 Rear heating,ventilation, and airconditioning blower

11 Second row seat

12 Liftgate module

13 Third row seat

14 Rear accessory poweroutlet

15 Rear windowdefogger

16 Liftgate


320 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

17 Liftglass

18 Rear fog lamp (ifequipped)

19 Rear fog lamp (ifequipped)

20 Heated mirror

Relays Usage

1 Rear windowdefogger

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too muchflexing. There could be ablowout and a seriouscrash. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 200.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires aremore likely to be cut,punctured, or broken bya sudden impact — suchas when hitting a pothole.Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If thetread is badly worn,replace them.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 321

Warning (Continued)

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

See Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation 0 328 forinflation pressure adjustment forhigh-speed driving.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires 0 321.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increased

traction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires 0 335.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:

. Use tires of the same brand andtread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If winter


322 Vehicle Care

tires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Low-Profile TiresIf the vehicle has P275/55R20 orP285/45R22 size tires, they areclassified as touring tires andare designed for on road use.The low-profile, wide treaddesign is not recommended foroff-road driving. See Off-RoadDriving 0 192, for additionalinformation.

Caution

Low-profile tires are moresusceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact thanstandard profile tires. Tire and/orwheel assembly damage canoccur when coming into contactwith road hazards like potholes,or sharp edged objects, or whensliding into a curb. The warrantydoes not cover this type of

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

damage. Keep tires set to thecorrect inflation pressure andwhen possible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other roadhazards.

All-Terrain TiresThis vehicle may have all-terraintires. These tires provide goodperformance on most road surfaces,weather conditions, and for off-roaddriving. See Off-Road Driving 0 192.

The tread pattern on these tires maywear more quickly than other tires.Consider rotating the tires morefrequently than at 12 000 km(7,500 mi) intervals if irregular wearis noted when the tires areinspected. See Tire Inspection0 333.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into the sidewall. Theexample shows a typicalpassenger vehicle tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric)/Spare Tire

(1) Tire Size : The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.


Vehicle Care 323

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture : The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the third

week of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) : Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform TireQuality Grading 0 337.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressure0 327 and Vehicle Load Limits0 200.

(8) Temporary Use Only : Onlyuse a temporary spare tire untilthe road tire is repaired andreplaced. This spare tire shouldnot be driven on over 112 km/h(70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph)when pulling a trailer, with theproper inflation pressure. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire 0 350.


324 Vehicle Care

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The example shows a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire :The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem C of the tire illustration, itwould mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as high asit is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description : Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tire

is certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure : The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight : Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio : The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt : A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.


Vehicle Care 325

Bead : The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure : Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressure0 327.

Curb Weight : The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings : A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.

Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR : Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limits0 200.

GAWR FRT : Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 200.

GAWR RR : Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 200.

Intended Outboard Sidewall :The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa) : The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index : An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure :The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating : Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight : The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.


326 Vehicle Care

Normal Occupant Weight : Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 200.

Occupant Distribution :Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall : Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure : Vehiclemanufacturer's recommended

tire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard.See Tire Pressure 0 327 andVehicle Load Limits 0 200.

Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim : A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall : The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating : Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction : The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread : The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators : Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires0 335.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards) : A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading 0 337.

Vehicle Capacity Weight : Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 200.


Vehicle Care 327

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire : Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard : A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits 0 200.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Caution

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits 0 200. How thevehicle is loaded affects vehiclehandling and ride comfort. Neverload the vehicle with moreweight than it was designed tocarry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a monthor more.


328 Vehicle Care

Do not forget the spare tire,if the vehicle has one. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire 0 350 foradditional information.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If the

inflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture and prevent leaks. Useonly valve caps designed for thevehicle by GM. TPMS sensorscould be damaged and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ Warning

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, putsadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat buildupand can cause sudden tire failure.This could cause a crash, and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

you or others could be killed.Some high-speed rated tiresrequire inflation pressureadjustment for high-speedoperation. When speed limits androad conditions allow the vehicleto be driven at high speeds, makesure the tires are rated forhigh-speed operation, are inexcellent condition, and are set tothe correct cold tire inflationpressure for the vehicle load.

When driving the vehicle at speedsof 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher, setthe cold inflation pressure to 20 kPa(3 psi) above the recommended tirepressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. Returnthe tires to the recommended coldtire inflation pressure whenhigh-speed driving has ended.See Vehicle Load Limits 0 200 andTire Pressure 0 327.


Vehicle Care 329

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.

This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 330.



330 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressure

shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 200.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. If the vehicle has DICbuttons, tire pressure levels can beviewed. For additional informationand details about the DIC operationand displays, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 151.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires when

they are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 200, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location. Also see TirePressure 0 327.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspection0 333, Tire Rotation 0 334 and Tires0 320.

Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 331

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. Themalfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that cancause these to come on are:

. One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC messageshould go off after the road tireis replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires 0 335.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire pressure condition. Seeyour dealer for service if the TPMSmalfunction light and DIC messagecome on and stay on.

Tire Fill Alert (If Equipped)

This feature provides visual andaudible alerts outside the vehicle tohelp when inflating an underinflatedtire to the recommended cold tirepressure.

When the low tire pressure warninglight comes on:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe, levelplace.

2. Set the parking brake firmly.

3. Place the vehicle in P (Park).

4. Add air to the tire that isunderinflated. The turn signallamp will flash.


332 Vehicle Care

When the recommendedpressure is reached, the hornsounds once and the turnsignal lamp will stop flashingand briefly turn solid.

Repeat these steps for allunderinflated tires that haveilluminated the low tire pressurewarning light.

If the tire is overinflated by morethan 35 kPa (5 psi), the horn willsound multiple times and the turnsignal lamp will continue to flash foreight seconds after filling stops. Torelease and correct the pressure,while the turn signal lamp is stillflashing, briefly press the center ofthe valve stem. When therecommended pressure is reached,the horn sounds once.

If the turn signal lamp does not flashwithin 15 seconds after starting toinflate the tire, the tire fill alert hasnot been activated or is not working.

If the hazard warning flashers areon, the tire fill alert visual feedbackwill not work properly.

The TPMS will not activate the tirefill alert properly under the followingconditions:

. There is interference from anexternal device or transmitter.

. The air pressure from theinflation device is not sufficientto inflate the tire.

. There is a malfunction inthe TPMS.

. There is a malfunction in thehorn or turn signal lamps.

. The identification code of theTPMS sensor is not registered tothe system.

. The battery of the TPMS sensoris low.

If the tire fill alert does not operatedue to TPMS interference, move thevehicle about 1 m (3 ft) back orforward and try again. If the tire fillalert feature is not working, use atire pressure gauge.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool. A TPMSrelearn tool can also be purchased.See Tire Pressure Monitor SensorActivation Tool atwww.gmtoolsandequipment.com orcall 1-800-GM TOOLS(1-800-468-6657).


Vehicle Care 333

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition on withoutstarting the vehicle or place thevehicle in Service Mode.See Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) 0 207 or IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access)0 205.

3. Make sure the Tire Pressureinfo page option is turned on.The info pages on the DIC canbe turned on and off throughthe Settings menu. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 151.

4. Use the DIC controls on theright side of the steering wheelto scroll to the Tire Pressurescreen under the DICinfo page.

5. Press and hold V in the centerof the DIC controls.

The horn sounds twice tosignal the receiver is in relearnmode and the TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

6. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

7. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

8. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

9. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

10. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 7. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has been

matched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.


12. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:

. The indicators at three ormore places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.


334 Vehicle Care

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 370.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after the

rotation, check the wheelalignment.See When It Is Time for NewTires 0 335 and WheelReplacement 0 339.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label after

the tires have been rotated.See Tire Pressure 0 327 andVehicle Load Limits 0 200.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation 0 330.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications 0 384.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.


Vehicle Care 335

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors, such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. Somecommercial truck tires may not havetreadwear indicators.See Tire Inspection 0 333 and TireRotation 0 334 for additionalinformation.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacture date is the last fourdigits of the DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN) which is molded intoone side of the tire sidewall. Thefirst two digits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the third week ofthe year 2010 would have afour-digit DOT date of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,


336 Vehicle Care

GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 322 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adversely

affected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation 0 334 for informationon proper tire rotation. However,if it is necessary to replace onlyone axle set of worn tires, placethe new tires on the rear axle.

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

This vehicle may have adifferent size spare than theroad tires originally installedon the vehicle. When new, thevehicle included a spare tireand wheel assembly with asimilar overall diameter as theroad tires and wheels, so it isall right to drive on it. Thespare tire was developed foruse on this vehicle and will notaffect vehicle handling.


Vehicle Care 337

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the wintertires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 329.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits0 200 for the label location andmore information about the Tireand Loading Information label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,

or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires 0 335 andAccessories and Modifications0 278.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingThe following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration


338 Vehicle Care

(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from the

norm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistance


Vehicle Care 339

to the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other roadsurface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.

Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.


340 Vehicle Care

Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

If the vehicle has 265/65R18,P265/65R18, P275/55R20,or P285/45R22 size tires, do notuse tire chains. There is notenough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination and roadconditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slowand readjust or remove thetraction device if it is contactingthe vehicle. Do not spin thewheels.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

If traction devices are used, installthem on the rear tires.

Caution

If the vehicle has P255/70R17 orP265/70R17 size tires, use tirechains only where legal and onlywhen necessary. Use chains thatare the proper size for the tires.Install them on the rear tires only.Do not use chains on the fronttires. Tighten them as tightly aspossible with the ends securelyfastened. Drive slowly and followthe chain manufacturer'sinstructions. If the chains contactthe vehicle, stop and retightenthem. If the contact continues,slow down until it stops. Drivingtoo fast or spinning the wheelswith chains on will damage thevehicle.


Vehicle Care 341

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. If air goesout of a tire, it is much more likely toleak out slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others could

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

be badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 0 174.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever inP (Park).

(Continued)


342 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

3. For vehicles with four-wheeldrive with an N (Neutral)transfer case position, besure the transfer case is in adrive gear — not inN (Neutral).

4. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

5. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

6. Place wheel blocks,if equipped, on both sides ofthe tire at the oppositecorner of the tire beingchanged.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1), if equipped.

1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to use the jack and changea tire.

Tire ChangingBefore changing a flat tire, see“Hands-Free Operation” underLiftgate 0 43.

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The equipment needed to change aflat tire is stored in the rear of thevehicle, on the driver side, behind adoor in the trim panel.

1. Jack Knob2. Wing Nut Retaining the

Wheel Blocks3. Wing Nut Retaining the

Tool Bag


Vehicle Care 343

1. Pull to open the trimpanel door.

The third row driver side seatmay need to be folded toaccess the trim panel door.

2. Lift the acoustic pad to accessthe jack and tools.

3. Turn the wing nut retaining thetool bag (3) counterclockwise toremove it.

Pull the tool bag toward thefront of the vehicle and lift therear portion of the bag upwardto remove it.

4. Turn the jack knob (1)counterclockwise to release thejack and wheel blocks from thebracket.

5. Turn the wing nut retaining thewheel blocks (2)counterclockwise to remove thewheel blocks and the wheelblock retainer.

Use the following tools:

1. Jack2. Wheel Blocks3. Jack Handle4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench

To access the spare tire, refer to thefollowing graphics and instructions:

1. Hoist Assembly2. Hoist Shaft3. Hoist Shaft Access

Cover/Hole4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench6. Spare Tire Lock7. Hoist End of Extension Tool8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole9. Spare Tire (Valve Stem

Pointed Down)10. Tire/Wheel Retainer11. Hoist Cable


344 Vehicle Care

1. Open the hoist shaft accessdoor (3) on the bumper toaccess the spare tire lock (6).

If equipped with a hitch cover,turn the hitch cover retainerscounterclockwise and pull thecover downward to remove itbefore removing the hoist shaftaccess door.

2. To remove the spare tire lock(6), insert the ignition key, turnit clockwise and then pull itstraight out.

3. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (4) and wheelwrench (5), as shown.

4. Insert the open end of theextension (7) through the holein the rear bumper (8) (hoistshaft access hole).

Be sure the hoist end of theextension (7) connects to thehoist shaft. The ribbed squareend of the extension is used tolower the spare tire.

5. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.


Vehicle Care 345

6. Use the wheel wrench hook topull the hoist cable closer toassist in reaching thespare tire.

7. Tilt the tire toward the vehiclewith some slack in the cable toaccess the tire/wheel retainer.Tilt the retainer and pull it andthe cable and spring throughthe center of the wheel.

Once the retainer is separatedfrom the guide pin, tilt theretainer and pull it through thecenter of the wheel along withthe cable and latch.

8. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat 0 341 for more information.

2. If the vehicle has a center capthat covers the wheelfasteners, place the chisel endof the wheel wrench in the sloton the wheel and gently pry thecap out.

If the wheel has a bolt-on hubcap, loosen the plastic nut capsby turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. The plasticnut caps will be retained in thehub cap after it is removedfrom the wheel.

3. Use the wheel wrench toloosen all the wheel nuts. Turnthe wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen thewheel nuts. Do not remove thewheel nuts yet.


346 Vehicle Care

Jacking Locations (Overall View)

4. Position the jack under thevehicle, as shown.

Left Front Shown, Right FrontSimilar

Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire ison a front tire of the vehicle,use the jack handle and only

one jack handle extension.Attach the wheel wrench to thejack handle extension. Attachthe jack handle to the jack.Position the jack on the framebehind the flat tire where theframe sections overlap. Turnthe wheel wrench clockwise toraise the vehicle. Raise thevehicle far enough off theground so there is enoughroom for the spare tire to clearthe ground.

Rear Position

Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire ison a rear tire of the vehicle,use the jack handle (2) and

both jack handleextensions (3). Attach thewheel wrench (4) to the jackhandle extensions (3). Attachthe jack handle (2) to thejack (1). Use the jackingpad (5) provided on the rearaxle. Turn the wheel wrench (4)clockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enoughoff the ground so there isenough room for the spare tireto clear the ground.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.


Vehicle Care 347

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

5. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

6. Take off the flat tire.

7. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a paper

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

towel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

8. Put the wheel nuts back onwith the rounded end of thenuts toward the wheel aftermounting the spare tire.

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

9. Tighten each wheel nut byhand. Then use the wheelwrench to tighten the nuts untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

10. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thevehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.


348 Vehicle Care

11. Tighten the nuts firmly in acrisscross sequence as shownby turning the wheel wrenchclockwise.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer when

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

using accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 384 for originalequipment wheel nut torquespecifications.

Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the propersequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications0 384 for the wheel nut torquespecification.

When reinstalling the regular wheeland tire, also reinstall either thecenter cap or the bolt-on hub cap,depending on which one thevehicle has.

. For center caps, line up the tabon the center cap with the slot inthe wheel. The cap only goes inone way. Place the cap on thewheel and press until it snapsinto place.

. For bolt-on hub caps, line up theplastic nut caps with the wheelnuts and tighten clockwise byhand to get them started. Thentighten with the wheel wrenchuntil snug.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.


Vehicle Care 349

Caution

Storing an aluminum wheel with aflat tire under your vehicle for anextended period of time or withthe valve stem pointing up candamage the wheel. Always stowthe wheel with the valve stempointing down and have thewheel/tire repaired as soon aspossible.

Caution

The tire hoist can be damaged ifthere is no tension on the cablewhen using it. To have thenecessary tension, the spare orroad tire and wheel assemblymust be installed on the tire hoistto use it.

Store the tire under the rear of thevehicle in the spare tire carrier.Refer to the following graphics andinstructions:

1. Hoist Assembly2. Hoist Shaft3. Hoist Shaft Access

Cover/Hole4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench6. Spare Tire Lock7. Hoist End of Extension Tool8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole9. Spare Tire (Valve Stem

Pointed Down)10. Tire/Wheel Retainer

11. Hoist Cable

1. Put the tire (9) on the ground atthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem pointed down, andto the rear.

2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle.Separate the tire/wheel retainerfrom the guide pin. Pull the pinthrough the center of thewheel. Tilt the retainer downthrough the center wheelopening.

Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.


350 Vehicle Care

3. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (4) and wheelwrench (5).

4. Insert the open end of theextension (7) through the holein the rear bumper (8) (hoistshaft access hole).

5. Raise the tire part way upward.Make sure the retainer isseated in the wheel opening.

6. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear twoclicks or feel it skip twice. Thecable cannot be overtightened.

7. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull, and thentry to turn the tire. If the tiremoves, use the wheel wrenchto tighten the cable.

8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.

9. Reinstall the hoist shaft accesscover.

If equipped, reinstall the hitchcover and turn the retainersclockwise.

To store the tools:

1. Return the tools (wheelwrench, jack handle, and jackhandle extensions) to thetool bag.

2. Assemble the wheel blocksand jack together with thewing nut.

3. Position the jack and wheelblocks in the driver side trimpanel over the wheelhouse.

4. Turn the jack knob clockwiseuntil the jack is secured tight inthe mounting bracket. Be sureto position the holes in thebase of the jack onto the pin inthe mounting bracket.

5. Use the retaining bracket tofasten the tool bag on the studand turn the wing nut clockwiseto secure.

6. Close the trim panel door.

Full-Size Spare TireIf this vehicle came with a full-sizespare tire, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly.See Tire Pressure 0 327 andVehicle Load Limits 0 200. For


Vehicle Care 351

instructions on how to remove,install, or store a spare tire, see TireChanging 0 342.

If equipped with a temporary usefull-size spare tire, it is indicated onthe tire sidewall. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 322. This spare tireshould not be driven on over112 km/h (70 mph), or 88 km/h(55 mph) when pulling a trailer, atthe proper inflation pressure. Repairand replace the road tire as soon asit is convenient, and stow the sparetire for future use.

Caution

If the vehicle has four-wheel driveand a different size spare tire isinstalled, do not drive infour-wheel drive until the flat tireis repaired and/or replaced. Thevehicle could be damaged andthe repairs would not be coveredby the warranty. Never usefour-wheel drive when a differentsize spare tire is installed on thevehicle.

The vehicle may have a differentsize spare tire than the road tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle.This spare tire was developed foruse on this vehicle, so it is all rightto drive on it. If the vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and a different sizespare tire is installed, drive only intwo-wheel drive.

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, stop as soon as possibleand check that the spare tire iscorrectly inflated.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced and installedback onto the vehicle as soon aspossible so the spare tire will beavailable in case it is needed again.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep your spare tire and itswheel together. If the vehicle has aspare tire that does not match theoriginal road tires and wheels in sizeand type, do not include the spare inthe tire rotation.

Jump Starting

Jump Starting - NorthAmericaFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery - NorthAmerica 0 298.

If the vehicle's battery has rundown, you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTER

(Continued)


352 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

HANDLING. For more informationgo to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See California Proposition65 Warning 0 277 and the backcover.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle.It must have a 12-volt batterywith a negative ground system.

Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables canreach, but be sure the vehiclesare not touching each other.If they are, it could cause an

unwanted ground connection.You would not be able to startyour vehicle, and the badgrounding could damage theelectrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put the automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parkingbrake. For vehicles withfour-wheel-drive with aN (Neutral) transfer caseposition, be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear — notN (Neutral).

Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 353

Caution (Continued)

warranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

3. Turn the ignition off on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into theaccessory power outlets. Turnoff the radio and all the lampsthat are not needed. This willavoid sparks and help saveboth batteries. And it couldsave the radio!

4. Open the hood on the othervehicle and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on thatvehicle.

The positive (+) terminal isunder a red plastic cover at thepositive battery post. Touncover the positive (+)terminal, open the red plasticcover.

For more information on thelocation of the remotepositive (+) and remotenegative (−) terminals, seeEngine Compartment Overview0 280.

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it in

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

your eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehiclescould be damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) willgo to positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted


354 Vehicle Care

metal engine part or to aremote negative (−) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on thedead battery because this cancause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+)terminal of the vehicle with thedead battery.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

8. Connect the black negative (−)cable to the negative (−)terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to the metalbracket that is bolted to the

engine and supports theresonator, on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

10. Start the vehicle with the goodbattery and run the engine for awhile.

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.


Vehicle Care 355

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

After starting the disabled vehicleand removing the jumper cables,allow it to idle for several minutes.

Towing the Vehicle

Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Do not lash or hook tosuspension components. Use theproper straps around the tires tosecure the vehicle.

Use only a flatbed tow truck fortowing a disabled vehicle. Neveruse a sling type lift or damage willoccur. Use ramps to help reduceapproach angles if necessary.A towed vehicle should have itsdrive wheels off the ground.

Consult a professional towingservice if the disabled vehicle mustbe towed.

Front Attachment Points

The vehicle is equipped withspecific attachment points to beused to pull the vehicle onto aflatbed car carrier from a flat roadsurface. Do not use theseattachment points to pull the vehiclefrom snow, mud or sand.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as a motor home. Thetwo most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are


356 Vehicle Care

dinghy and dolly towing. Dinghytowing is towing the vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground. Dollytowing is towing the vehicle with twowheels on the ground and twowheels on a dolly.

Follow the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s instructions. Seeyour dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

Caution

Use of a shield mounted in frontof the vehicle grille could restrictairflow and cause damage to thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If using a shield, onlyuse one that attaches to thetowing vehicle.

Dinghy Towing

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Caution

If the two-wheel-drive vehicle istowed with all four wheels on theground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with all four wheels on theground.

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Only dinghy tow four-wheel-drivevehicles with a two speed transfercase that have a N (Neutral) and a 4n setting.

{ Warning

Shifting a four-wheel-drivevehicle's transfer case intoN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). You or others couldbe injured. Set the parking brakebefore shifting the transfer caseto N (Neutral).


Vehicle Care 357

To dinghy tow:

1. Position the vehicle beingtowed behind the tow vehicle,facing forward and on a levelsurface.

2. Securely attach the vehiclebeing towed to the tow vehicle.

3. Apply the parking brake andstart the engine.

4. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoN (Neutral)” under Four-WheelDrive 0 222. Check that thevehicle is in N (Neutral) bystarting the engine and shiftingthe transmission toR (Reverse) and then to D(Drive). There should be nomovement of the vehicle whileshifting.

5. Shift the transmission intoD (Drive). Turn the engine off.

Caution

Failure to disconnect the negativebattery cable or to have it contactthe terminals can cause damageto the vehicle.

6. Disconnect the negativebattery cable at the battery andsecure the nut and bolt. Coverthe negative battery post with anon-conductive material toprevent any contact with thenegative battery terminal.

7. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

Caution

If the steering column is locked,vehicle damage may occur.

8. Move the steering wheel tomake sure the steering columnis unlocked.

9. With a foot on the brake pedal,release the parking brake.

10. Keep the ignition key in thetowed vehicle in ACC/ACCESSORY to prevent thesteering column from locking.If equipped with KeylessAccess, keep the RKEtransmitter outside of thevehicle, and manually lock thedoors. Access the vehicle as ifit has a dead RKE transmitterbattery, by using the key in thedoor lock.

Disconnecting the Towed Vehicle

Before disconnecting the towedvehicle:

1. Park on a level surface.

2. Set the parking brake, thenshift the transmission toP (Park).

3. Connect the battery.

4. Apply the brake pedal.


358 Vehicle Care

5. Turn the ignition to ON/RUNwith the engine off. Shift thetransfer case out of N (Neutral)to 2 m. See “Shifting out ofN (Neutral)” under Four-WheelDrive 0 222. See your dealer ifthe transfer case cannot beshifted out of N (Neutral).

6. Check that the vehicle is in 2 mby starting the engine andshifting the transmission toR (Reverse) and then to D(Drive). There should bemovement of the vehicle whileshifting.

7. Shift the transmission toP (Park) and turn off theignition.

8. Disconnect the vehicle from thetow vehicle.


10. Reset any lost presets.

The outside temperaturedisplay will default to 0 °C(32 °F) but will reset withnormal usage.

Dolly Towing – Front Towing(Front Wheels Off the Ground)

Caution

If a two-wheel-drive vehicle istowed with the rear wheels on theground, the transmission could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Never tow the vehiclewith the rear wheels on theground.

Caution

Towing a four-wheel-drive vehiclewith all four wheels on theground, or even with only two ofits wheels on the ground, willdamage drivetrain components.Do not tow a four-wheel-drivevehicle with any of its wheels onthe ground.

This vehicle should not be towedwith the rear wheels on the ground.


Vehicle Care 359

Dolly Towing – Rear Towing(Rear Wheels Off theGround) – Four-Wheel-DriveVehicles

Caution

Towing a four-wheel-drive vehiclewith all four wheels on theground, or even with only two ofits wheels on the ground, willdamage drivetrain components.Do not tow a four-wheel-drivevehicle with any of its wheels onthe ground.

This vehicle should not be towedwith any wheels on the ground.

Dolly Towing – Rear Towing(Rear Wheels Off theGround) – Two-Wheel-DriveVehicles

To dolly tow the vehicle fromthe rear:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake 0 228.

4. Put the transmission inP (Park).

5. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

6. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheelsare locked into the straightposition.

7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.


360 Vehicle Care

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 379.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

your dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

Caution

Do not power wash anycomponent under the hood that

has thise symbol.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

This could cause damage thatwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,follow the car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that maybe damaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer to


Vehicle Care 361

have the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

may damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum, chrome orstainless steel. To prevent damagealways follow these cleaninginstructions:

. Be sure the molding is cool tothe touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use only approved cleaningsolutions for aluminum, chromeor stainless steel. Somecleaners are highly acidic orcontain alkaline substances andcan damage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.


362 Vehicle Care

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals, andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses,emblems, decals, and stripes.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" previously in thissection.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating. Do not clean or wipe themwhen dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:

. Abrasive or caustic agents.

. Washer fluids and other cleaningagents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshield,when washing the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply Dielectric silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfaces


Vehicle Care 363

can be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 379.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium, calcium,or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaning

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

brushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Brake System

Visually inspect brake lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect drumbrake linings/shoes for wear orcracks. Inspect all other brake parts.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year.

Inspect power steering for properattachment, connections, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.


364 Vehicle Care

For 1500 Series vehicles, at leastevery other oil change lubricate theouter tie rod ends.

Control arm ball joints on 1500Series vehicles aremaintenance-free.

Caution

Lubrication of applicable steering/suspension points should not bedone unless the temperature is−12 °C (10 °F) or higher,or damage could result.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, steelfuel door hinge and power assiststep hinges, unless the componentsare plastic. Applying silicone greaseon weatherstrips with a clean clothwill make them last longer, sealbetter, and not stick or squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and fall,use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the

underbody. Take care to thoroughlyclean any areas where mud andother debris can collect. If equippedwith power assist steps, extendthem and then use a high pressurewash to clean all joints and gaps.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or axles andshould be replaced.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils.Newspapers or dark garments cantransfer color to the vehicle’sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately remove


Vehicle Care 365

hand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Use cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces being cleaned toprevent permanent damage. Applyall cleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners on anyswitches or controls. Removecleaners quickly.

Before using cleaners, read andfollow all safety instructions on thelabel. While cleaning the interior,open the doors and windows to getproper ventilation.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:

. Never use a razor or any othersharp object to remove soil fromany interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with too muchpressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willcreate streaks and attract dirt.Do not use solutions that containstrong or caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.If necessary, use a commercialglass cleaner after cleaning withplain water.

Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with waterand mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.

. When lightly soiled, wipe with asponge or soft, lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.


366 Vehicle Care

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating vacuum brush attachment isbeing used, only use it on the floorcarpet. Before cleaning, gentlyremove as much of the soil aspossible:

. Gently blot liquids with a papertowel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean, lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth

to a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

After cleaning, use a paper towel toblot excess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

Use a microfiber cloth on high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays. First,use a soft bristle brush to remove

dirt that can scratch the surface.Then gently clean by rubbing with amicrofiber cloth. Never use windowcleaners or solvents. Periodicallyhand wash the microfiber clothseparately, using mild soap. Do notuse bleach or fabric softener. Rinsethoroughly and air dry beforenext use.

Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces, andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.


Vehicle Care 367

Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel ofleather or soft trim, and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorinebleach. Rinse with cold water, andthen dry completely.

Care of Seat Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, theymight not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean andrinse seat belt webbing only withmild soap and lukewarm water.Allow the webbing to dry.

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.


368 Vehicle Care

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage:

. The original equipment floormats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Do not use a floor mat if thevehicle is not equipped with afloor mat retainer on the driverside floor.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

Pull up on the rear of the driver sidefloor mat to unlock each retainerand remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snapping into position.

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


Service and Maintenance 369

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 369

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 370

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . 382

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oil

changes and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

Do not have chemical flushes thatare not approved by GMperformed on the vehicle. Theuse of flushes, solvents, cleaners,or lubricants that are notapproved by GM could damagethe vehicle, requiring expensiverepairs that are not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended to


370 Service and Maintenance

have your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services -Normal are for vehicles that:

. Carry passengers and cargowithin recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits0 200.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeFuel 0 254.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:

. Mainly driven in heavy city trafficin hot weather

. Mainly driven in hilly ormountainous terrain

. Frequently towing a trailer

. Used for high speed orcompetitive driving

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work 0 278.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop

. Check the engine oil level. SeeEngine Oil 0 283.

Once a Month

. Check the tire inflationpressures. See Tire Pressure0 327.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection 0 333.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid0 296.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system may notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor up to a year. The engine oil andfilter must be changed at least once



a year and the oil life system mustbe reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System 0 285.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation 0 334.

. Check engine oil level and oillife percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system.See Engine Oil 0 283 andEngine Oil Life System 0 285.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeCooling System 0 291.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid 0 296.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare 0 360. Replace worn ordamaged wiper blades. SeeWiper Blade Replacement0 303.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure 0 327.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection 0 333.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter0 290.

. Inspect brake system. SeeExterior Care 0 360.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wearat least once a year. SeeExterior Care 0 360. Lubricatethe suspension and steeringcomponents at least every otheroil change (if equipped withgrease fittings).

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck 0 83.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care 0 360.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check 0 302.



. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check0 302.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck 0 303.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check0 303.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. If the holdopen is low, service the gasstrut. See Gas Strut(s) 0 305.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof 0 58.

. Verify spare tire key lockoperation and lubricate asneeded. See Tire Changing0 342.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with4WD. (4) @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7)



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentpassenger compartment air filterreplacement may be needed ifdriving in areas with heavy traffic,poor air quality, high dust levels,or environmental allergens.Passenger compartment air filterreplacement may also be needed ifthere is reduced airflow, windowfogging, or odors. Your GM dealercan help determine when to replacethe filter.

(2) Visually check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for properattachment, connection, routing, andcondition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the transfer case fluid.

Contaminated fluid will decrease thelife of the transfer case and/or axlesand should be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 291.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(7) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 297.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. @ @ @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with4WD. (4) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7)

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentpassenger compartment air filterreplacement may be needed ifdriving in areas with heavy traffic,

poor air quality, high dust levels,or environmental allergens.Passenger compartment air filterreplacement may also be needed ifthere is reduced airflow, windowfogging, or odors. Your GM dealercan help determine when to replacethe filter.

(2) Visually check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for properattachment, connection, routing, andcondition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.



(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the transfer case fluid.Contaminated fluid will decrease thelife of the transfer case and/or axlesand should be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 291.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(7) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 297.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every oil change.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Care0 360.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The 12-volt battery supplies powerto start the engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.



. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts

. Belts may need replacing if theysqueak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.

. Signs of brake wear may includechirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 379 for GM approvedfluids.

. Engine oil and windshieldwasher fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.

. Signs that the headlamps needattention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.

. Signs of wear may includesteering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signs



of leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.

. Signs that the tires need to bereplaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. For

information on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care 0 364 andExterior Care 0 360.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.

. Signs that the alignment mayneed to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.

. Signs of damage includescratches, cracks, and chips.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.

. Signs of wear include streaking,skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Automatic Transmission (ExceptDenali)

DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission(Denali Only)

DEXRON ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19352619, inCanada 19352620).

Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Cooling System 0 291.

Engine Oil Engine oil meeting the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE viscositygrade. ACDelco dexos1 is recommended. See Engine Oil 0 283.

Front Axle (Four-Wheel Drive) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, inCanada 89021678).

Front Axle Propshaft Spline orOne-Piece Propshaft Spline

(Two-Wheel Drive)

Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 19257121, inCanada 19257122).

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19353126, inCanada 19299819).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood Hinges,Power Assist Steps, and OuterLiftgate Handle Pivot Points

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Rear Axle SAE 75W-85 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 19300457, inCanada 19300458).

Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).

Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22845992 A3181C

Oil Filter

5.3L V8; 6.2L V8 19330000 PF63E

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 23281440 CF188



Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Spark Plugs

5.3L V8; 6.2L V8 12622441 41-114

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 22756331 —

Passenger Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 22756331 —

Rear – 33 cm (13.0 in) 22956295 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


Technical Data 383

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 385

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe driver side of the vehicle. It canbe seen through the windshield fromoutside. The Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) also appears on theVehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specifications0 384 for the vehicle's engine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThere may be a label on the insideof the glove box that contains thefollowing information:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Model designation

. Paint information

. Production options and specialequipment

If there is no label, there is abarcode on the certification label onthe center (B) pillar to scan for thissame information.


384 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 379 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System

5.3L V8; 6.2L V8 16.8 L 17.8 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

5.3L V8; 6.2L V8 7.6 L 8.0 qt

Fuel Tank

Short Wheelbase 98.4 L 26.0 gal

Long Wheelbase 119.2 L 31.5 gal

Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


Technical Data 385

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Spark Plug Gap

5.3L V8 C 0.95–1.10mm (0.037–0.043 in)

6.2L V8 J 0.95–1.10mm (0.037–0.043 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing

5.3L and 6.2L V8 Engines


386 Customer Information

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 389

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . 389GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 393Service Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 398OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 399

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toGMC. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE : Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.

STEP TWO : If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot be


Customer Information 387

resolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-462-8782. In Canada, callGeneral Motors of CanadaCustomer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting GMC, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners :Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line Program toenforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.3033 Wilson Blvd.Suite 600Arlington, VA 22201

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100http://www.bbb.org/council/programs-services/dispute-handling-and-resolution/bbb-auto-line

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners : In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of Canada



Company wants you to be aware ofits participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of CanadaCompany has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputesinvolving factory-related vehicleservice claims. The programprovides for the review of the factsinvolved by an impartial third partyarbiter, and may include an informalhearing before the arbiter. Theprogram is designed so that theentire dispute settlement process,from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should becompleted in about 70 days. Webelieve our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of CanadaCompanyMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesGMC encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail GMC, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.GMC.com

1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782)1-888-889-2438 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-888-881-3302

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of CanadaCompanyCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmc.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.



Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user in the U.S.can communicate with GMC bydialing: 1-888-889-2438. TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.gmc.com

The GMC online owner experienceis a one-stop resource that allowsinteraction with GMC and keepsimportant vehicle-specificinformation in one place.

Membership Benefits

E : Download owner’s manualsand view vehicle-specific how-tovideos.

G : View maintenance schedules,alerts, and OnStar onboard vehiclediagnostic information. Scheduleservice appointments.

I : View and print dealer-recordedservice records and self-recordedservice records.

D : Select a dealer and viewlocations, maps, phone numbers,and hours.

r : Track your vehicle’s warrantyinformation.

J : View active recalls by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)0 383.

H : View GM Card, SiriusXMSatellite radio (if equipped), andOnStar account information (ifequipped).

F : Chat live with online helprepresentatives.

See my.gmc.com to register yourvehicle.

GMC Centre (Canada) gmc.ca

Take a trip to the GMC Centre:

. Chat live with online helprepresentatives.

. Use the Vehicle Tools section.

. Access third party enthusiastsites and social media networks.

. Locate resources such aslease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner’s manualfor your vehicle, quickly andeasily.

. Find the GMC-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.



GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement, up to certain limits,of eligible aftermarket adaptiveequipment required for the vehicle,such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift for thevehicle.

To learn about the GM Mobilityprogram, see www.gmmobility.comor call the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility program. See www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE(800-463-7483) for details. TTYusers call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-888-881-3302; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:

. Your name, home address, andhome telephone number

. Telephone number of yourlocation

. Location of the vehicle

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided for theduration of the vehicle's powertrainwarranty.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andGMC reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

General Motors North America andGMC reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.



. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest GMC dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was in acrash and cannot be driven.Assistance is not given when thevehicle is stuck in the sand,mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyevent, incidental expenses may

be reimbursed within thePowertrain warranty period.Items considered are reasonableand customary hotel, meals,rental car, or a vehicle beingdelivered back to the customer,up to 805 km (500mi).

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws

. Legal fines

. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices

Service is not provided if a vehicleis in an area that is not accessibleto the service vehicle or is not aregularly traveled or maintainedpublic road, which includes ice andwinter roads. Off-road use is notcovered.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is up to 7 L. Diesel fuel deliverymay be restricted. Propane andother fuels are not providedthrough this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over150 km from where your trip wasstarted to qualify.Pre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders are required.Once authorization has beenreceived, the RoadsideAssistance advisor will help tomake arrangements and explainhow to receive payment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receipt



to Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”

furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, yourdealer may offer the followingtransportation options:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters ofyour dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must besupported by original receipts andwithin the maximum amount allowedby GM for shuttle service. If U.S.customers arrange their owntransportation, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costs



and be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completedrental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.Additional fees such as fuel usagecharges, taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usagebeyond the completion of the repairare also your responsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Contact your dealerfor specific availability.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.



Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate-of-the-art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacement

parts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program0 390.

Gather the following information:

. Driver name, address, andtelephone number

. Driver license number

. Owner name, address, andtelephone number

. Vehicle license plate number



. Vehicle make, model, andmodel year

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Insurance company and policynumber

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? 0 90.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycled

original GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner’s Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner’s Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 –$40.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Pouch: Owner’sManual only.



RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Service and Owner publications areavailable for many current and pastmodel year GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomplies with Part 15/Part 18 of theFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and withInnovation, Science and EconomicDevelopment (ISED) Canada'sRSP-100 / license-exempt RSS's /ICES-001.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.



To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of CanadaCompany. Call TransportCanada at 1-800-333-0510;go to:

www.tc.gc.ca/recalls (English)

www.tc.gc.ca/rappels (French)

or write to:

Transport CanadaMotor Vehicle Safety DirectorateDefect Investigations andRecalls Division80 Noel StreetGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of CanadaCompanyCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

In Mexico, call 01-800-466-0801.

In other Central America andCaribbean Countries, call52-722-236-0680.



Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:

. How various systems in yourvehicle were operating;

. Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur.

NoteEDR data are recorded by yourvehicle only if a non-trivial crashsituation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) are recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.



GM will not access these data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStarIf the vehicle is equipped withOnStar and has an active serviceplan, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation;collisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to the

OnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

See OnStar Additional Information0 406.

Infotainment SystemUsing the navigation system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. See theinfotainment manual for informationon stored data and for deletioninstructions.


400 OnStar

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

OnStar Overview

= Voice Command Button

Q Blue OnStar Button

> Red Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to an OnStarAdvisor for Emergency, Security,Navigation, Connections, andDiagnostics Services. OnStarservices may require a paid serviceplan and data plan. OnStar requiresthe vehicle battery and electricalsystem, cellular service, and GPSsatellite signals to be available andoperating. OnStar acts as a link toexisting emergency serviceproviders. OnStar may collectinformation about you and yourvehicle, including locationinformation. See OnStar User

Terms, Privacy Statement, andSoftware Terms for more detailsincluding system limitations atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:

. Solid Green: System is ready.

. Flashing Green: On a call.

. Red: Indicates a problem.

. Off: System is active. PressQtwice to speak with an OnStarAdvisor.

PressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion.

Press= to:

. Open the OnStar app on theinfotainment display. See theinfotainment manual forinformation on how to use theOnStar app.


OnStar 401

Or

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.

. Obtain and customize the Wi-Fihotspot name or SSID andpassword, if equipped.

PressQ to connect to anAdvisor to:

. Verify account information orupdate contact information.

. Get driving directions.

. Receive a Diagnostic check ofthe vehicle's key operatingsystems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

. Manage Wi-Fi Settings,if equipped.

Press> to get a priority connectionto an OnStar Advisor available 24/7 to:

. Get help for an emergency.

. Be a Good Samaritan orrespond to an AMBER Alert.

. Get assistance in severeweather or other crisis situationsand find evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyEmergency Services require anactive, OnStar service plan(excludes Basic Plan). WithAutomatic Crash Response, built-insensors can automatically alert aspecially trained OnStar Advisorwho is immediately connected in tothe vehicle to help.

Press> for a priority connection toan OnStar Advisor who can contactemergency service providers, directthem to your exact location, andrelay important information.

With OnStar Crisis Assist, speciallytrained Advisors are available24 hours a day, 7 days a week, toprovide a central point of contact,assistance, and information during acrisis.

With Roadside Assistance, Advisorscan locate a nearby service providerto help with a flat tire, a batteryjump, or an empty gas tank.


402 OnStar

SecurityIf equipped, OnStar provides theseservices:

. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance,OnStar Advisors can use GPS topinpoint the vehicle and helpauthorities quickly recover it.

. With Remote Ignition Block,if equipped, OnStar can blockthe engine from being restarted.

. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown,if equipped, OnStar can workwith law enforcement togradually slow the vehicle down.

Theft Alarm Notification

If equipped, if the doors are lockedand the vehicle alarm sounds, anotification by text, e-mail, or phonecall will be sent. If the vehicle isstolen, an OnStar Advisor can workwith authorities to recover thevehicle.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires aspecific OnStar service plan.

PressQ to receive Turn-by-Turndirections or have them sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to anAdvisor.

2. Request directions to bedownloaded to the vehicle.

3. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion. For some vehicles, press=to open the OnStar app on theinfotainment display. For othervehicles press= as follows.

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

3. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview


2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” Systemresponds with the last directiongiven, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.


OnStar 403

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with theaddress and distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Send Destination to Vehicle

Directions can be sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

PressQ, then ask the Advisor todownload directions to the vehicle’snavigation system, if equipped. Afterthe call ends, the navigation screenwill provide prompts to begin drivingdirections. Routes that are sent tothe navigation screen can only becanceled through the navigationsystem.

See www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsThe following OnStar services helpwith staying connected.

For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

Ensuring Security

. Change the default passwordsfor the Wi-Fi hotspot andmyGMC mobile application.Make these passwords differentfrom each other and use acombination of letters, numbers,and symbols to increase thesecurity.

. Change the default name of theSSID (Service Set Identifier).This is your network’s name thatis visible to other wirelessdevices. Choose a unique nameand avoid family names orvehicle descriptions.

OnStar Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)

The vehicle may have a built-inWi-Fi hotspot that provides accessto the Internet and web content at4G LTE speed. Up to seven mobile

devices can be connected. A dataplan is required. Use the in-vehiclecontrols only when it is safe todo so.

1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspotinformation, press= to openthe OnStar app on theinfotainment display, thenselect Wi-Fi Hotspot. On somevehicles, touch Wi-Fi or Wi-FiSettings on the screen.

2. The Wi-Fi settings will displaythe Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password, and on somevehicles, the connection type(no Internet connection, 3G,4G, 4G LTE), and signal quality(poor, good, excellent).

3. To change the SSID orpassword, pressQ or call1-888-4ONSTAR to connectwith an Advisor. On somevehicles, the SSID andpassword can be changed inthe Wi-Fi Hotspot menu.

After initial set-up, your vehicle’sWi-Fi hotspot will connectautomatically to your mobile


404 OnStar

devices. Manage data usage byturning Wi-Fi on or off on yourmobile device, using the myGMCmobile app, or by contacting anOnStar Advisor. On some vehicles,Wi-Fi can also be managed from theWi-Fi Hotspot menu.

MyGMC Mobile App (If Available)

Download the myGMC mobile appto compatible Apple and Androidsmartphones. GMC users canaccess the following services from asmartphone:

. Remotely start/stop the vehicle,if factory-equipped.

. Lock/unlock doors, if equippedwith automatic locks.

. Activate the horn and lamps.

. Check the vehicle’s fuel level, oillife, or tire pressure,if factory-equipped with the TirePressure Monitor System.

. Send destinations to the vehicle.

. Locate the vehicle on a map(U.S. market only).

. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspoton/off, manage settings, andmonitor data consumption,if equipped.

. Locate a dealer and scheduleservice.

. Request roadside assistance.

. Set a parking reminder with pindrop, take a photo, make a note,and set a timer.

. Connect with GMC on socialmedia.

For myGMC mobile app informationand compatibility, see my.gmc.com.

An active OnStar service,compatible device, factory-installedremote start, and power locks arerequired. Data rates apply. Seeonstar.com for details and systemlimitations.

Remote Services

Contact an OnStar Advisor tounlock the doors or sound the hornand flash the lamps.

OnStar AtYourService

OnStar Advisors can provide offersfrom restaurants and retailers onyour route, help locate hotels,or book a room. These servicesvary by market.

OnStar Hands-Free Calling

Make and receive calls with thebuilt-in wireless calling service,which requires available minutes.Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion. For some vehicles, press=to open the OnStar app on theinfotainment display, then selectHands-Free calling. For othervehicles press= as follows.

Make a Call

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”


OnStar 405

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK, calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency


2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds:“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

DiagnosticsBy monitoring and reporting on thevehicle’s key systems, OnStarAdvanced Diagnostics provides away to keep up on maintenance.Capabilities vary by model. Seewww.onstar.com for details andsystem limitations. Message anddata rates may apply. AdvancedDiagnostics requires an activeOnStar paid service plan, e-mailaddress on file, and enrollment inAdvanced Diagnostics.

Includes:

. Diagnostic Alerts: Setpreferences to receive real-timee-mails, texts, or monthly reportsof the vehicle’s health. OrpressQ to have an Advisorinitiate a remote diagnosticreport.

. Proactive Alerts: Receive areal-time e-mail or text messageregarding potential issues withkey vehicle components, suchas the battery, fuel system,or starter system. Alerts forpotential issues appear on theinfotainment display. ProactiveAlerts are designed to helppredict specific types of issuesbased on information collectedfrom the vehicle. Other factorsmay affect vehicle performance.Not all issues will deliver alerts.In some cases, a dealer servicecheck may be required toconfirm the accuracy of thealerts.

. Dealer Maintenance Notification:Have the vehicle notify yourpreferred dealer when it is timefor maintenance. Your dealer willthen contact you to set up anappointment.

To begin, pressQ to speak to anAdvisor, or see www.onstar.com.


406 OnStar

OnStar AdditionalInformationOnStar Smart Driver

OnStar Smart Driver providesinformation about driving behavior tohelp maximize overall vehicleperformance, reduce wear and tear,and enhance fuel efficiency. AnInsurance Discounts Eligibilityfeature is also offered within OnStarSmart Driver. See www.onstar.comfor details regarding vehicleeligibility and system limitations.

OnStar, General Motors, and theiraffiliates are not insuranceproviders. Obtain insurance onlyfrom licensed insurance providers.

In-Vehicle Audio Messages

Audio messages may play importantinformation at the following times:

. Prior to vehicle purchase.PressQ to set up an account.

. With the OnStar Basic Plan,every 60 days.

. After change in ownership andat 90 days.

Transferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan cancel or change accountinformation.

Selling/Transferring theVehicle

Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) immediately toterminate your OnStar services ifthe vehicle is disposed of, sold,transferred, or if the lease ends.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible. The Advisor will updatevehicle records and explain OnStarservice options.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance,

Advanced Vehicle Diagnostics,Remote Services, RoadsideAssistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar User Terms,Privacy Statement, and SoftwareTerms:

. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).

. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).

. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar services cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area. The wireless serviceprovider must also have coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservices. Service involving location


OnStar 407

information about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar services may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar services maynot work. Other problems beyondthe control of OnStar — such ashills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather,electrical system design andarchitecture of the vehicle, damageto the vehicle in a crash, or wirelessphone network congestion orjamming — may prevent service.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpwith physical disabilities andmedical conditions.

PressQ to help:

. Locate a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Provide directions to the closesthospital or pharmacy in urgentsituations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access someOnStar services. The PIN will needto be changed the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, contact anOnStar Advisor by pressingQ orcalling 1-888-4ONSTAR.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the vehiclewarranty.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask for an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish, and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for 10 dayswithout an ignition cycle. If thevehicle has not been started for10 days, OnStar can contactRoadside Assistance or a locksmithto help gain access to the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;


408 OnStar

around airports; in tunnels andunderpasses; or in an area withvery dense trees. If GPS signalsare not available, the OnStarsystem should still operate tocall OnStar. However, OnStarcould have difficulty identifyingthe exact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

A temporary loss of GPS can causeloss of the ability to send aTurn-by-Turn Navigation route. TheAdvisor may give a verbal route ormay ask for a call back after thevehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Cellular reception is required forOnStar to send remote signals tothe vehicle. Do not place items overor near the antenna to preventblocking cellular and GPS signalreception.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 274. Added electricalequipment may interfere with theoperation of the OnStar system andcause it to not operate.

Vehicle Software Updates

OnStar or GM may remotely deliversoftware updates or changes to thevehicle without further notice orconsent. These updates or changesmay enhance or maintain safety,security, or the operation of thevehicle or the vehicle systems.Software updates or changes mayaffect or erase data or settings thatare stored in the vehicle, such asOnStar Hands-Free Calling nametags, saved navigation destinations,or pre-set radio stations. NeitherOnStar nor GM is responsible forany affected or erased data orsettings. These updates or changesmay also collect personalinformation. Such collection isdescribed in the OnStar privacystatement or separately disclosed atthe time of installation. Theseupdates or changes may also causea system to automaticallycommunicate with GM servers tocollect information about vehiclesystem status, identify whetherupdates or changes are available,or deliver updates or changes. Anactive OnStar agreement constitutes


OnStar 409

consent to these software updatesor changes and agreement thateither OnStar or GM may remotelydeliver them to the vehicle.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Werecommend that you review it. If youhave any questions, call1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)or pressQ to speak with anAdvisor. Users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third partiesmay unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - SoftwareAcknowledgements

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associated with

libcurl and unzip and for other thirdparty software please see http://opensource.lge.com/index

www.onstar.com/us/en/

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that theabove copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR

COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this documentshould be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.


410 OnStar

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binaryor disabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existingports with new graphicalinterfaces, and dynamic,shared, or static libraryversions–must be plainlymarked as such and must notbe misrepresented as beingthe original source. Suchaltered versions also must notbe misrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including,but not limited to, labeling ofthe altered versions with thenames “Info-ZIP” (or anyvariation thereof, including, butnot limited to, differentcapitalizations), “PocketUnZip,” “WiZ” or “MacZip”without the explicit permissionof Info-ZIP. Such alteredversions are further prohibitedfrom misrepresentative use ofthe Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).


OnStar 411

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its ownsource and binary releases.


412 Index

Index AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Active Fuel Management . . . . . . . 214Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . 235Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . 274Additional InformationOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . 290Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . .180, 184Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Passenger Sensing System . . . .91What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Airbag System (cont'd)What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . .86AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Passenger Status Indicator . . . 142Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

AlertLane Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . . 250

All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . 227Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119


Index 413

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Assistance Systems forParking and Backing . . . . . . . . . . 243

AutomaticDimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Forward Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Transmission Fluid . . . . . . 286, 289

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

BBatteryExterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Battery (cont'd)Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Battery - North America . . . .298, 351Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . 303Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54BrakePedal and AdjustableThrottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

System Warning Light . . . . . . . . 145Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Automatic Forward . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 204Bulb ReplacementBack-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . 308Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 255Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

CaliforniaProposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . .277, 298, 351,

Back CoverCanadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . 2Capacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

CargoTie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . 2Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 120Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340ChargingWireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . 142CheckEngine Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143


414 Index

Check (cont'd)Ignition Transmission Lock . . . 303

Child RestraintsInfants and Young Children . . . . .98Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 114Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Child-View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . 393CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126ConnectionsOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

ControlHill Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Control (cont'd)Traction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52CoolantEngine Temperature Gauge . . 138Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180, 184Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Cruise Control, Adaptive . . . . . . . . 235Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 389Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . . . 395

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . 393Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . 2Data CollectionInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 399OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . 398Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42DiagnosticsOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . 385Driver Assistance Systems . . . . . 242Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

DrivingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . 246Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259


Index 415

Driving (cont'd)Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190For Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . .26Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 198If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 200Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 191Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 200Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

EE85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Electrical SystemEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 309Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 317

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

EmergencyOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Check Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Compartment Overview . . . . . . . 280Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 385Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . 137Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Running While Parked . . . . . . . . 215Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . 398Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 170Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 172Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

FeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 174Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

FlexFuelE85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367FluidAutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . 286, 289

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Four-Wheel DriveTransfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 307


416 Index

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Forward Automatic Braking . . . . . 248Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . .222, 299Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . . 146Frequency StatementRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Front SeatsHeated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . .67

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . 149Management, Active . . . . . . . . . . 214Requirements, California . . . . . 255

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 350FusesEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Fuses (cont'd)Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 309Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 317

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . 166Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 137Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Transmission Temperature . . . . 139Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 369Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 174Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 149High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 172Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 150

HeatedRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180, 184


Index 417

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 149High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . 328Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 198Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . . 231Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . 229Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180, 184

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . .205, 207Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51IndicatorVehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 55Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

JJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

KKeyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . 31, 33

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 28

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . 322LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . 173Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Malfunction Indicator(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . 250Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . 252Lane Keep Assist Light . . . . . . . . . 146

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . 104

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Level ControlAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . 176LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Brake System Warning . . . . . . . 145Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Check Engine (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . . 148


418 Index

Lights (cont'd)Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 149Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Four-Wheel-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 172Lane Keep Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . 140Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 149Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

MMagnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . . 232MaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . 370Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . 143Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64MessagesEngine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

MirrorChild-View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Mirrors (cont'd)Automatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . 55Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

NNavigationOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . 204Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . 301

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283


Index 419

Oil (cont'd)Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 285Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . 137Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . 97Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . 389OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

OnStar Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 403OnStar Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405OnStar Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401OnStar Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400OnStar Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402OperationFog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . . . 395

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Parking (cont'd)Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 303

Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . 214

Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Parking or BackingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . 243

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . 91Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . . 278

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . 212Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . . . . 82

PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . 398

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . . 392

Proposition65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . .277, 298, 351,

Back Cover

RRadio Frequency Statement . . . . 396Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Rear Climate Control System . . . 184Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . 243Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 125Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 355


420 Index

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 33

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 39ReplacementGlass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . 96Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Replacing Seat Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 397General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Ride Control SystemsMagnetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . 385Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

SSafety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 397General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . 392Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . .84Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . .82

SeatsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61Heated and Ventilated Front . . . .67Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . .63Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . .62Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . .63Second Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 114

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . 278Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 382Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Parts Identification Label . . . . . 383


Index 421

Service (cont'd)Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 392ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . 250Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Special Application Services . . . . 376Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Start Assist, Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . 39Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . 302Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Steering (cont'd)Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

StepsPower Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 118StrutsGas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3SystemForward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 399Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

System (cont'd)Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

SystemsDriver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . 389Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . 51Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321All-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327, 328Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Pressure Monitor Operation . . 330Pressure Monitor System . . . . . 329


422 Index

Tires (cont'd)Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Terminology and Definitions . . 324Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 339When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . 146TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . . 259Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267General Information . . . . . . . . . . 259Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 355Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 273Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . 273Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . 286, 289Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . 139

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

UUniform Tire Quality Grading . . . 337Universal Remote System . . . . . . 166Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Identification Number (VIN) . . . 383Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Vehicle (cont'd)Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . 146Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . 145Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . . 252

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

WarningsHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance . . 339Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339


Index 423

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . 102Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . 303WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Yukon/Yukon XL/Denali Owner’s Manual

2018 Yukon/Yukon XL/Denali

84016524 A

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

18_GMC_Yukon_YukonDenalli_COV_en_US_84016524A_2017JUN23.ai 1 6/21/2017 8:13:42 AM18_GMC_Yukon_YukonDenalli_COV_en_US_84016524A_2017JUN23.ai 1 6/21/2017 8:13:42 AM

Date post:	05-Jan-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	4 times
Download:	0 times

C M Y CM Yukon/Yukon XL/Denali Owner’s Manual · GMC Yukon/Yukon XL/Denali Owner Manual...

Documents